1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8345 The following 2 lines are empty:
8348 \begin_layout Verbatim
8352 \begin_layout Verbatim
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8367 environment is identical to
8371 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8372 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8379 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8383 \begin_layout Section
8384 Nesting Environments
8385 \begin_inset Index idx
8388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8389 Nesting ! Environments
8395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8404 \begin_layout Subsection
8408 \begin_layout Standard
8410 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8412 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8414 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8416 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8428 \begin_layout Enumerate
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8451 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8452 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8468 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8477 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8479 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8482 arg "depth-increment"
8488 arg "depth-decrement"
8502 arg "depth-increment"
8508 arg "depth-decrement"
8512 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8513 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8518 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8519 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8520 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8521 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8522 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8528 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8530 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8533 \begin_layout Subsection
8534 What You Can and Can't Nest
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8538 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8539 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8544 than a simple yes or no.
8545 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 Completely unnestable
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8562 \begin_layout Standard
8563 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8564 environments have them:
8567 \begin_layout Description
8568 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8569 Can't nest into them.
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8597 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Description
8606 \begin_inset space ~
8609 Nestable You can nest them.
8610 You can nest other things into them.
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8656 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8669 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Description
8677 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8678 You can't nest anything into them.
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_inset space ~
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8786 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8796 \begin_inset space ~
8799 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8800 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8801 nested section headings violate this.
8809 \begin_layout Subsection
8810 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8811 \begin_inset Index idx
8814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8815 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8823 \begin_layout Standard
8824 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8825 affected by nesting anyhow.
8829 \begin_layout Itemize
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Standard
8843 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8851 Figures and tables in
8855 are not affected by this.
8860 Have a look at section
8861 \begin_inset space ~
8865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8867 reference "sec:Floats"
8871 for more information about
8878 \begin_layout Standard
8880 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8881 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8894 of its own, it behaves just like a
8895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8902 paragraph environment.
8903 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8907 \begin_layout Standard
8908 Here's an example with a table:
8911 \begin_layout Enumerate
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 This is (a) and it's nested.
8921 \begin_layout Standard
8922 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8930 \begin_inset Tabular
8931 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8932 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9018 \begin_layout Standard
9019 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9032 \begin_layout Enumerate
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9040 \begin_layout Enumerate
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 This is (a) and it's nested.
9050 \begin_layout Standard
9051 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9057 \begin_layout Standard
9059 \begin_inset Tabular
9060 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9061 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9154 \begin_layout Enumerate
9161 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9169 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9177 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9180 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 This is (a) and it's nested.
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9190 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9198 \begin_inset Tabular
9199 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9200 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9287 \begin_layout Standard
9288 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9294 \begin_layout Enumerate
9296 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
9307 \begin_layout Standard
9308 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9314 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9315 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9319 \begin_layout Subsection
9320 Usage and General Features
9323 \begin_layout Standard
9324 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9325 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9334 is the innermost possible depth.
9335 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9338 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 level #1 – outermost
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Itemize
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9372 \begin_layout Standard
9373 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9374 both of them in the example.
9375 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9385 For example, if we tried to nest another
9390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9397 , we would get errors.
9400 \begin_layout Subsection
9402 \begin_inset Index idx
9405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9416 We have several examples of nested environments.
9417 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9422 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9436 \begin_layout Labeling
9437 \labelwidthstring MMM
9438 #2-a This is level #2.
9439 We created it by using
9442 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9448 arg "depth-increment"
9455 \begin_layout Labeling
9456 \labelwidthstring MMM
9457 #3-a This is level #3.
9458 This time, we just enter
9465 arg "depth-increment"
9469 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9473 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9479 arg "depth-increment"
9486 \begin_layout Standard
9491 environment, nested inside of
9492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9500 So, it's at level #4.
9501 We did this by entering
9504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9510 arg "depth-increment"
9513 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9518 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9534 \begin_layout Standard
9539 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9548 \begin_layout Labeling
9549 \labelwidthstring MMM
9550 #4-a This is level #4.
9554 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9557 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9562 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9566 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9571 keep nesting things inside
9572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9583 \begin_layout Labeling
9584 \labelwidthstring MMM
9585 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9590 \begin_layout Labeling
9591 \labelwidthstring MMM
9592 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9593 and this is level #6.
9594 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9598 \begin_layout Labeling
9599 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 #5-b Back to level #5.
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9610 arg "depth-decrement"
9617 \begin_layout Labeling
9618 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9628 arg "depth-decrement"
9631 , we're back at level #4.
9635 \begin_layout Labeling
9636 \labelwidthstring MMM
9637 #3-b Back to level #3.
9638 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9642 \begin_layout Labeling
9643 \labelwidthstring MMM
9644 #2-b Back to level #2.
9649 \begin_layout Labeling
9650 \labelwidthstring MMM
9651 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9652 After this sentence, we will enter
9656 and change the paragraph environment back to
9663 \begin_layout Standard
9664 We could have also used the
9680 environment in place of the
9685 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9689 Example 2: Inheritance
9692 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9705 arg "depth-increment"
9709 \begin_inset Newline newline
9712 which, we will change to the
9720 \begin_layout Enumerate
9725 environment, at level #2.
9728 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 Notice how the nested
9733 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9737 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9741 \begin_layout Standard
9742 We ended this example by entering
9747 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9751 and reset the nesting depth by using
9754 arg "depth-decrement"
9760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9761 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9770 \begin_inset Argument 1
9773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9774 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9782 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 This is level #1, in an
9787 paragraph environment.
9788 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9792 \begin_layout Enumerate
9797 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9803 arg "depth-increment"
9807 Now, what happens if we nest an
9811 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9812 label be? An asterisk?
9816 \begin_layout Itemize
9826 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9827 So, its label is a bullet.
9828 (We got here by using
9831 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9837 arg "depth-increment"
9840 , then changing the environment to
9848 \begin_layout Itemize
9849 Here's level #4, produced using
9852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9862 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9867 \begin_layout Enumerate
9870 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9875 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9879 , because we are in the
9887 environment (that is, it is an
9902 \begin_layout Enumerate
9907 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9908 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9912 \begin_layout Enumerate
9913 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9916 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9919 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9922 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 arg "depth-decrement"
9929 to decrease the depth after the next
9932 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9939 \begin_layout Enumerate
9941 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9949 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9963 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9968 reset the counter for the label.
9972 \begin_layout Enumerate
9976 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9982 arg "depth-decrement"
9985 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9986 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9987 into the twofold-nested
9995 \begin_layout Enumerate
9996 The same thing happens if we do another
9999 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10005 arg "depth-decrement"
10008 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10011 \begin_layout Standard
10012 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10017 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10028 The number of other
10032 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10039 The same rule applies for the
10043 environment, as well.
10046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10047 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10050 \begin_layout Enumerate
10051 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10052 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10053 the same detail with how we did it.
10062 \begin_layout Standard
10070 arg "depth-increment"
10077 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10078 the example in parentheses someplace.
10079 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10080 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10081 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10085 \begin_layout Enumerate
10090 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10094 \begin_layout Verse
10095 Now we will add verse.
10096 \begin_inset Newline newline
10099 It will get much worse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "depth-increment"
10120 \begin_layout Verse
10121 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10122 \begin_inset Newline newline
10125 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10132 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10140 \begin_layout Verse
10141 Here comes a table:
10145 \begin_layout Standard
10146 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10152 \begin_layout Standard
10154 \begin_inset Tabular
10155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10156 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10243 \begin_layout Verse
10247 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 arg "depth-increment"
10263 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10269 \begin_inset Newline newline
10277 arg "depth-decrement"
10284 \begin_layout Enumerate
10289 : level #1) This is another item.
10290 Note that selecting a
10294 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10295 3 times to put the table inside the
10303 \begin_layout Quotation
10304 We're now ending the
10308 list and changing to
10313 We're still at level #1.
10314 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10315 The next set of paragraphs is a
10316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10323 We will nest both the
10330 \begin_inset space ~
10335 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10339 for the letter body.
10343 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10346 to preserve the depth.
10347 Remember that you need to use
10350 arg "newline-insert newline"
10353 to create multiple lines inside the
10360 \begin_inset space ~
10370 \begin_layout Right Address
10372 \begin_inset Newline newline
10375 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10382 \begin_layout Address
10384 \begin_inset space ~
10390 \begin_layout Quotation
10391 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10395 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10396 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10397 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10398 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10399 as soon as possible.
10400 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10403 \begin_layout Quotation
10404 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10405 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10406 with your order, along with payment.
10409 \begin_layout Quotation
10410 We thank you again for your patience.
10413 \begin_layout Address
10415 \begin_inset Newline newline
10422 \begin_layout Quotation
10423 That ends that example!
10426 \begin_layout Standard
10427 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10428 gives you a lot of power with just
10430 We could have easily nested an
10451 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10454 \begin_layout Subsection
10456 \begin_inset Index idx
10459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10460 Nesting ! Separation
10466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10468 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10475 \begin_layout Standard
10476 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10478 For example you need two different enumerations:
10481 \begin_layout Enumerate
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Standard
10496 \begin_inset Separator plain
10502 \begin_layout Itemize
10508 \begin_layout Standard
10509 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10515 \begin_layout Enumerate
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Standard
10528 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10529 list item and use the menu
10531 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10532 Start New Environment
10535 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10536 ) and behind it the new list.
10539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10540 Start New Parent Environment
10542 only appears if the item is nested.
10543 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10547 \begin_layout Standard
10548 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10549 (red arrow in LyX).
10550 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10551 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10554 \begin_layout Standard
10555 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10558 arg "paragraph-break"
10565 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10568 \begin_layout Section
10569 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10570 \begin_inset Index idx
10573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10582 \begin_layout Standard
10583 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10584 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10586 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10587 be broken at the end of a line.
10588 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10592 \begin_layout Subsection
10594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10596 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10601 \begin_inset Index idx
10604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 \begin_layout Standard
10614 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10615 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10616 ) not to break the line at
10618 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10621 \begin_layout Quote
10622 Further documentation is given in section
10623 \begin_inset Newline newline
10627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10629 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10637 \begin_layout Standard
10638 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10653 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10662 A protected space is set with
10664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10665 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10667 \begin_inset space ~
10675 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10681 \begin_layout Subsection
10683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10685 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10690 \begin_inset Index idx
10693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10694 Spacing ! Horizontal
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10706 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 The length units are listed in Appendix
10711 \begin_inset space ~
10715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10717 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10728 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10733 \begin_inset Index idx
10736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10737 Spaces ! Inter-word
10745 \begin_layout Standard
10746 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10747 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10748 at the ends of sentences.
10749 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10750 automatically takes care about this.
10751 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10752 followed by a period; see section
10753 \begin_inset space ~
10757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10759 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10764 To insert a normal space, select
10766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10769 \begin_inset space ~
10777 arg "space-insert normal"
10783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10787 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10792 \begin_inset Index idx
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10804 \begin_layout Standard
10806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10813 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10822 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10823 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10824 inside abbreviations:
10827 \begin_layout Quote
10829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10836 \begin_layout Standard
10837 or between values and units.
10838 Compare for example this:
10839 \begin_inset Newline newline
10843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10847 \begin_inset Newline newline
10850 10 kg (normal space
10853 \begin_layout Standard
10854 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10857 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 \begin_inset space ~
10867 arg "space-insert thin"
10873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10877 \begin_layout Standard
10878 You can also insert the following space types:
10881 \begin_layout Description
10883 \begin_inset space ~
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10890 space A line with a
10891 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10895 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10899 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10902 negative thin space between the arrows.
10905 \begin_layout Description
10907 \begin_inset space ~
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10914 space A line with a
10915 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10919 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10923 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10926 negative medium space between the arrows.
10929 \begin_layout Description
10931 \begin_inset space ~
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10938 space A line with a
10939 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10943 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10947 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10950 negative thick space between the arrows.
10953 \begin_layout Description
10955 \begin_inset space ~
10959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10963 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10967 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10971 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10982 em) space between the arrows.
10985 \begin_layout Description
10987 \begin_inset space ~
10991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10999 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11003 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11014 em) space between the arrows.
11017 \begin_layout Description
11019 \begin_inset space ~
11023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11031 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11035 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11046 em) space between the arrows.
11049 \begin_layout Description
11051 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11059 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11064 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11071 cm space between the arrows.
11074 \begin_layout Standard
11076 \begin_inset space ~
11080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11082 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11086 lists the different space sizes.
11089 \begin_layout Standard
11090 \begin_inset Float table
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11096 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11101 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11105 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11115 \begin_inset Tabular
11116 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11117 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11118 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11235 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11394 \begin_inset Index idx
11397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11406 \begin_layout Standard
11407 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11408 feature for adding extra space
11409 in a uniform fashion.
11410 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11411 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11412 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11413 equally between themselves.
11416 \begin_layout Standard
11417 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11422 This is on the left side
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11426 This is on the right
11429 \begin_layout Quote
11432 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11442 \begin_layout Quote
11445 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_layout Standard
11460 That was an example in the
11466 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11470 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11474 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11477 is one in a standard paragraph.
11478 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11482 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11486 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11494 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11559 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11563 \begin_inset space ~
11569 \begin_layout Standard
11570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11578 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11582 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11584 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11585 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11589 option in the space dialog.
11597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11601 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11606 \begin_inset Index idx
11609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11618 \begin_layout Standard
11619 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11620 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11627 What is correct English?:
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset space ~
11639 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11640 \begin_inset Newline newline
11644 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11655 \begin_inset Newline newline
11659 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11670 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11676 \begin_layout Standard
11678 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11683 \begin_inset space ~
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11695 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11698 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11719 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11728 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11729 That is why it is named
11730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11738 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11739 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11743 \begin_layout Subsection
11745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11747 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11752 \begin_inset Index idx
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 \begin_layout Standard
11765 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 \begin_inset space ~
11776 There you find the following sizes:
11779 \begin_layout Standard
11792 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11793 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11798 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11801 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11803 \begin_inset space ~
11809 \begin_inset Index idx
11812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11813 Document ! Settings
11818 for the paragraph separation.
11819 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11830 \begin_layout Standard
11836 \begin_inset Index idx
11839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11845 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11846 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11851 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11852 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11861 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11870 s are described in section
11871 \begin_inset space ~
11875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11877 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11886 If there are several
11890 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11891 You can therefore use
11895 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11898 \begin_layout Standard
11903 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11904 \begin_inset space ~
11908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11910 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11928 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11929 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11941 \begin_layout Subsection
11942 Paragraph Alignment
11943 \begin_inset Index idx
11946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11947 Paragraph ! Alignment
11955 \begin_layout Standard
11956 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11961 dialog (toolbar button
11964 arg "layout-paragraph"
11968 There are five possibilities:
11971 \begin_layout Itemize
11979 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11985 \begin_layout Itemize
11993 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11999 \begin_layout Itemize
12007 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12013 \begin_layout Itemize
12021 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12027 \begin_layout Itemize
12035 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12042 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12043 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12044 the left and right margins.
12045 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12050 This paragraph is right aligned,
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 this one is centered,
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 this one is left aligned.
12063 \begin_layout Subsection
12065 \begin_inset Index idx
12068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12069 Page breaks ! Forced
12075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12077 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12085 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12086 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12087 force a page break where you want one.
12088 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12089 is good at page breaking.
12090 Only if you use a lot of
12094 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12095 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12098 \begin_layout Standard
12099 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12100 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12104 have to change the page breaking.
12107 \begin_layout Standard
12108 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12110 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12113 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 \begin_inset space ~
12121 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12124 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 \begin_inset space ~
12131 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12133 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12134 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12137 \begin_layout Standard
12138 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12139 at the top of a page.
12140 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12142 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12143 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12144 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12148 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12152 to learn more about
12159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12163 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12168 \begin_inset Index idx
12171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12172 Page breaks ! Clear
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12181 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12182 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12183 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12184 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12185 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12188 \begin_layout Standard
12189 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12192 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 \begin_inset space ~
12200 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 \begin_inset space ~
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12214 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12215 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12218 \begin_layout Subsection
12220 \begin_inset Index idx
12223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12232 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12239 \begin_layout Standard
12240 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12242 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 \begin_inset space ~
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12259 arg "newline-insert newline"
12263 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 \begin_inset space ~
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12280 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12283 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12285 This is useful to avoid
12286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12293 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12296 \begin_layout Standard
12297 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12298 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12300 very good at line breaking.
12301 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12302 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12303 \begin_inset space ~
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12309 reference "sec:Quote"
12314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12316 reference "sec:Verse"
12321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12323 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12330 \begin_layout Subsection
12332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12334 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12339 \begin_inset Index idx
12342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12351 \begin_layout Standard
12353 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12364 \begin_layout Standard
12368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12369 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12371 \begin_inset space ~
12376 you can insert horizontal lines.
12377 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12378 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12379 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12382 \begin_layout Standard
12384 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12395 \begin_layout Section
12396 Characters and Symbols
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12400 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12401 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12402 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12410 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12414 for information on how this is done.
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12418 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12423 dialog via the menu
12425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12426 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12432 \begin_layout Standard
12433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12441 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12442 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12444 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12452 \begin_layout Section
12453 Fonts and Text Styles
12454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12456 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12463 \begin_layout Subsection
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12477 \begin_layout Standard
12478 There are two types of fonts:
12481 \begin_layout Description
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset Index idx
12490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12496 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12501 characters) in the font.
12502 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12503 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12504 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12505 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12506 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12507 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12508 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12509 \begin_inset Newline newline
12512 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12513 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12514 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12515 sizes than at small ones.
12516 \begin_inset Newline newline
12530 \begin_inset space ~
12538 \begin_layout Description
12540 \begin_inset space ~
12544 \begin_inset Index idx
12547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12553 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12554 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12555 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12556 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12557 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12558 image manipulation program.
12559 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12560 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12561 \begin_inset space ~
12564 pixels high up to 34
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12569 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12570 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12572 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12573 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12574 \begin_inset Newline newline
12577 Bitmap fonts are named
12580 \begin_inset space ~
12585 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12590 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12591 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12592 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12593 use scalable fonts.
12596 \begin_layout Standard
12597 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12602 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12603 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12604 font to emphasize text, you use an
12605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12613 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12615 In \SpecialChar LyX
12616 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12620 \begin_layout Subsection
12623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12625 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12632 \begin_layout Standard
12633 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 used its own fonts.
12635 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12636 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12641 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12642 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12643 to a word processor.
12644 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12645 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 files are very portable across
12647 different machines.
12648 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 has increased a lot
12650 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12653 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12655 \begin_inset space ~
12659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12661 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12666 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 code in the document
12668 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12671 \begin_layout Standard
12672 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12673 engines that are also able directly
12674 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12676 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12678 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12680 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12681 that is installed on your system.
12682 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12685 \begin_layout Standard
12686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12694 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12695 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12703 \begin_layout Subsection
12704 Document Font and Font size
12705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12707 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12712 \begin_inset Index idx
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_inset Index idx
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 \begin_layout Standard
12735 You can set the document fonts in the
12737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12741 \begin_inset Index idx
12744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12745 Document ! Settings
12755 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12756 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12759 \begin_inset space ~
12768 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12773 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12776 \begin_layout Standard
12781 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12782 This requires that you use
12794 as the output format, i.
12795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12799 \begin_inset space \space{}
12802 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12803 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12804 installed (see section
12805 \begin_inset space ~
12809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12811 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12816 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12818 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12819 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12821 \begin_inset space ~
12824 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12825 cannot determine the family.
12826 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12827 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12830 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12834 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12835 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12840 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12846 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12847 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12856 \begin_inset space ~
12862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12887 European Computer Modern
12890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12898 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12901 \begin_layout Standard
12906 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12907 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12912 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12915 \begin_inset space ~
12920 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12926 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12927 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12930 \begin_layout Itemize
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12939 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12952 \begin_inset space ~
12957 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12958 community in order to replace
12962 as the default font.
12963 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12964 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12967 \begin_inset space ~
12980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12981 One difference is improved kerning.
12989 \begin_layout Itemize
12990 If you do not like the look of
12998 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13003 \begin_inset space ~
13009 \begin_inset space ~
13019 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13020 \begin_inset space ~
13023 serif and typewriter fonts,
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13028 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13035 \begin_inset space ~
13044 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13049 \begin_inset space \space{}
13057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13061 \begin_inset space \space{}
13067 \begin_inset space ~
13075 \begin_inset space ~
13085 but you can also select your own.
13086 \begin_inset Newline newline
13089 The differences between roman,
13092 \begin_inset space ~
13101 fonts are explained in section
13102 \begin_inset space ~
13106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13108 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13113 \begin_inset Newline newline
13119 \begin_inset space ~
13124 was originally designed for newspapers.
13125 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13126 into the small newspaper columns.
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13135 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13138 \begin_layout Standard
13139 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13152 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13157 depends on the class you are using.
13158 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13161 \begin_layout Standard
13162 Note that the font size is the
13167 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13168 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13169 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13170 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13179 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13180 \begin_inset space ~
13184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13186 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13193 \begin_layout Standard
13197 \begin_inset space ~
13202 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13204 \begin_inset space ~
13207 serif or typewriter.
13212 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13222 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13225 \begin_layout Standard
13230 LaTeX font encoding
13232 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13233 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13239 \begin_inset Index idx
13242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13256 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13261 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13262 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13272 Use Old Style Figures
13276 Use True Small Caps
13279 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13282 Use Old Style Figures
13284 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13286 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13294 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13298 Use True Small Caps
13300 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13301 of scaled capitals.
13302 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13303 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13306 \begin_layout Standard
13311 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13312 a font to display the script characters.
13316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13317 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13323 \begin_inset Index idx
13326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13333 So this has no effect for the document language
13347 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13351 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13359 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13364 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13365 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13367 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13369 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13372 dialog, see section
13373 \begin_inset space ~
13377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13379 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13391 \begin_layout Subsection
13395 \begin_layout Standard
13396 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13397 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13399 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13400 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13401 choose a math font in the dialog
13403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13407 \begin_inset Index idx
13410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13411 Document ! Settings
13417 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13418 automatically selects a math font.
13419 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13420 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13429 \begin_inset space ~
13435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13440 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13441 document font is available.
13444 \begin_layout Standard
13445 Note that the math font will not be used for
13449 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13455 or by the insertion of the command
13462 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13463 \begin_inset space ~
13467 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13468 while the math characters do not.
13470 \begin_inset space ~
13473 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13476 \begin_inset space ~
13484 \begin_inset space ~
13489 in the document font settings.
13492 \begin_layout Standard
13493 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13494 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13495 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13496 font (in most cases
13497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13503 \begin_inset space ~
13509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13512 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13513 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13521 \begin_inset space ~
13527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13533 \begin_layout Subsection
13534 Using Different Character Styles
13535 \begin_inset Index idx
13538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13545 \begin_inset Index idx
13548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13557 \begin_layout Standard
13558 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13559 automatically changes the character style for certain
13560 paragraph environments.
13562 supports two character styles,
13571 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13575 \begin_layout Standard
13580 style, do one of the following:
13583 \begin_layout Itemize
13584 click on the toolbar button
13593 \begin_layout Itemize
13594 use the key binding
13603 \begin_layout Standard
13604 These commands are all toggles.
13609 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13612 \begin_layout Standard
13613 One typically uses the
13617 style for proper names.
13619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13626 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13634 \begin_layout Standard
13635 A more widely used character style is the
13640 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13647 \begin_layout Itemize
13648 clicking on the toolbar button
13657 \begin_layout Itemize
13658 using the keybindings
13667 \begin_layout Standard
13672 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13674 use a different font.
13677 \begin_layout Standard
13678 We've been using the
13682 style all over the place in this document.
13683 Here's one more example:
13686 \begin_layout Quotation
13689 Do not overuse character styles!
13692 \begin_layout Standard
13693 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13694 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13695 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13696 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13700 \begin_layout Standard
13701 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13709 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13711 \begin_inset space ~
13714 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13720 arg "dialog-show character"
13726 \begin_layout Subsection
13727 Fine-Tuning with the
13732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13734 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13739 \begin_inset Index idx
13742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13751 \begin_layout Standard
13752 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13754 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13755 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13756 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13757 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13758 from ordinary dialog.
13761 \begin_layout Standard
13762 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13763 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13764 \begin_inset Newline newline
13767 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13768 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13771 \begin_layout Standard
13772 To use custom character styles, open the
13774 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13776 \begin_inset space ~
13779 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13782 dialog or press the toolbar button
13785 arg "dialog-show character"
13789 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13790 font property that you can choose.
13791 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13794 \begin_inset space ~
13799 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13804 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13805 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13806 environments all at once.
13809 \begin_layout Standard
13810 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13813 \begin_inset space ~
13825 \begin_layout Labeling
13826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13840 The possible options are:
13844 \begin_layout Labeling
13845 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13850 This is the Roman font family.
13851 Normally a serif font.
13852 It's also the default family.
13862 \begin_layout Labeling
13863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13867 \begin_inset space ~
13874 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13886 \begin_layout Labeling
13887 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13894 This is the Typewriter font family.
13900 arg "font-typewriter"
13909 \begin_layout Labeling
13910 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13915 This corresponds to the print weight.
13920 \begin_layout Labeling
13921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13926 This is the Medium font series.
13927 It's also the default series.
13930 \begin_layout Labeling
13931 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13938 This is the Bold font series.
13951 \begin_layout Labeling
13952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13957 As the name implies.
13962 \begin_layout Labeling
13963 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13968 This is the Upright font shape.
13969 It's also the default shape.
13972 \begin_layout Labeling
13973 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13987 s the Italic font shape
13993 \begin_layout Labeling
13994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14001 This is the Slanted font shape
14003 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14004 , this is different from italic).
14007 \begin_layout Labeling
14008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14012 \begin_inset space ~
14019 This is the Small caps font shape
14026 \begin_layout Labeling
14027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14032 Alters the text color.
14033 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14037 \begin_inset space ~
14042 , which means that the document default color set in
14044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14045 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14051 \begin_inset space ~
14056 is used, you can choose between
14133 \begin_inset Index idx
14136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14145 \begin_layout Labeling
14146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14151 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14152 the language of the document.
14153 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14154 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14156 \begin_inset Newline newline
14159 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14161 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14162 When using the spell checking (see section
14163 \begin_inset space ~
14167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14169 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14173 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14176 \begin_layout Labeling
14177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14182 Alters the size of the font.
14183 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14184 proportional to the document font size.
14185 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14186 the details, but a general description of what
14192 \begin_layout Labeling
14193 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14214 arg "font-size tiny"
14220 \begin_layout Labeling
14221 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14242 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14248 \begin_layout Labeling
14249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14270 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14276 \begin_layout Labeling
14277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14298 arg "font-size small"
14304 \begin_layout Labeling
14305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14319 It's also the default size.
14323 arg "font-size normal"
14329 \begin_layout Labeling
14330 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14351 arg "font-size large"
14357 \begin_layout Labeling
14358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14379 arg "font-size larger"
14385 \begin_layout Labeling
14386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14407 arg "font-size largest"
14413 \begin_layout Labeling
14414 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14435 arg "font-size huge"
14441 \begin_layout Labeling
14442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14463 arg "font-size giant"
14469 \begin_layout Labeling
14470 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14475 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14495 arg "font-size increase"
14501 \begin_layout Labeling
14502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14507 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14527 arg "font-size decrease"
14534 \begin_layout Standard
14539 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14540 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14542 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14543 — use those instead.
14544 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14547 \begin_layout Labeling
14548 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14553 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14558 \begin_layout Labeling
14559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14566 This is text with emphasize on
14569 This might seem like the same as
14573 , but it is actually a bit different.
14579 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14581 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14584 \begin_layout Labeling
14585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14592 This is text with Underbar on.
14598 arg "font-underline"
14604 \begin_inset Newline newline
14609 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14610 when you could not change fonts.
14611 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14612 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14613 because some people
14617 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14620 \begin_layout Labeling
14621 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14625 \begin_inset space ~
14632 This is text with Double underbar on.
14638 arg "font-underunderline"
14642 \begin_inset Newline newline
14645 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14646 about double underbar.
14649 \begin_layout Labeling
14650 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14654 \begin_inset space ~
14661 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14667 arg "font-underwave"
14671 \begin_inset Newline newline
14674 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14675 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14678 \begin_layout Labeling
14679 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14686 This is text with Strikeout on.
14692 arg "font-strikeout"
14696 \begin_inset Newline newline
14699 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14700 changed in the meantime.
14703 \begin_layout Labeling
14704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14711 This is text with Noun on.
14718 , this is a logical attribute.
14719 Normally it's equivalent to
14722 \begin_inset space ~
14731 \begin_layout Standard
14732 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14733 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14735 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14737 \begin_inset space ~
14740 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14746 arg "dialog-show character"
14749 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14750 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14753 arg "textstyle-apply"
14757 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14761 \begin_layout Standard
14762 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14769 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14770 (suppose you just set the shape to
14771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14789 \begin_inset space ~
14801 \begin_layout Standard
14802 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14810 \begin_inset space ~
14822 \begin_layout Itemize
14828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14835 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14853 \begin_inset Newline newline
14857 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14871 \begin_inset Note Note
14874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14875 For more on phantoms see section
14876 \begin_inset space ~
14880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14882 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14892 \begin_inset Newline newline
14898 \begin_layout Itemize
14903 fonts use characters with serifs.
14904 These are the small
14905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14912 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14913 The following example shows the difference:
14914 \begin_inset Newline newline
14918 \begin_inset Newline newline
14923 text without serifs
14926 \begin_inset Newline newline
14929 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14930 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14937 \begin_layout Itemize
14942 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14943 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14944 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14947 \begin_layout Standard
14948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14955 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14956 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14959 \begin_inset space ~
14964 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14965 the property to be removed.
14966 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14967 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14968 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14986 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14987 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14995 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14999 \begin_inset space ~
15004 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15015 If you, for example, set
15016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15034 \begin_inset space ~
15039 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15048 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15051 \begin_layout Standard
15052 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15053 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15056 \begin_layout Section
15057 Printing and Previewing
15060 \begin_layout Subsection
15064 \begin_layout Standard
15065 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15066 using \SpecialChar LyX
15067 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15068 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15069 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15070 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15072 Additional Features
15077 \begin_layout Standard
15079 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15082 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15083 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15084 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15087 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15088 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15089 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15090 to turn your writing into printable output.
15091 This happens in two stages:
15094 \begin_layout Enumerate
15095 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15096 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15098 a file with the extension,
15099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15113 \begin_layout Enumerate
15114 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15115 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15116 to use the commands in the
15120 file to produce printable output.
15123 \begin_layout Subsection
15124 Output file formats
15125 \begin_inset Index idx
15128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15137 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15145 Simple text (ASCII)
15146 \begin_inset Index idx
15149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15150 File formats ! ASCII
15158 \begin_layout Standard
15159 This file type has the extension
15160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15172 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15176 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15183 \begin_layout Standard
15184 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15186 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15187 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15189 \begin_inset space ~
15195 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15196 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15197 bibliography (section
15198 \begin_inset space ~
15202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15204 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15209 If your document includes such material, use
15211 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15212 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15214 \begin_inset space ~
15218 \begin_inset space ~
15222 \begin_inset space ~
15230 \begin_inset space ~
15234 \begin_inset space ~
15240 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15241 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15244 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15247 \begin_inset Index idx
15250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15251 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15260 \begin_layout Standard
15261 This file type has the extension
15262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15273 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15276 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15277 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15278 -Errors or to process it manually
15279 with console commands.
15280 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15281 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15282 's temporary directory whenever you
15283 view or export your document.
15286 \begin_layout Standard
15287 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15288 -file using the menu
15290 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15291 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15295 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15296 export variants are explained in section
15297 \begin_inset space ~
15301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15303 reference "subsec:Export"
15310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15312 \begin_inset Index idx
15315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15324 \begin_layout Standard
15325 This file type has the extension
15326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15346 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15347 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15348 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15352 \begin_layout Standard
15353 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15354 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15355 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15356 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15357 when you view the DVI.
15358 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15361 \begin_layout Standard
15362 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15364 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15365 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15370 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15371 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15373 \begin_inset space ~
15379 The latter option uses the program
15381 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15387 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15390 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15391 font access (see section
15392 \begin_inset space ~
15396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15398 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15403 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15404 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15411 \begin_inset Index idx
15414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15415 File formats ! PostScript
15423 \begin_layout Standard
15424 This file type has the extension
15425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15437 PostScript was developed by the company
15441 as a printer language.
15442 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15444 PostScript can be seen as a
15445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15448 programming language
15449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15452 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15457 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15464 \begin_inset Index idx
15467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15469 packages ! pstricks
15479 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15482 \begin_layout Standard
15483 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15487 Encapsulated PostScript
15488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15491 (EPS, file extension
15492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15504 As \SpecialChar LyX
15505 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15506 convert them in the background to EPS.
15507 If, for example, you have 50
15508 \begin_inset space ~
15511 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15513 \begin_inset space ~
15516 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15517 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15519 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15520 EPS to avoid this problem.
15523 \begin_layout Standard
15524 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15526 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15527 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15533 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15535 \begin_inset Index idx
15538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15545 \begin_inset Index idx
15548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15557 \begin_layout Standard
15558 This file type has the extension
15559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15575 Portable Document Format
15576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15583 was derived from PostScript.
15584 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15593 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15594 looks exactly the same.
15597 \begin_layout Standard
15598 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15602 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15606 (JPG, file extension
15607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15634 Portable Network Graphics
15635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15638 (PNG, file extension
15639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15651 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15652 converts them in the
15653 background to one of these formats.
15654 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15655 will slow down your workflow.
15656 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15659 \begin_layout Standard
15660 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15662 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15668 \begin_layout Description
15670 \begin_inset space ~
15673 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15677 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15680 \begin_layout Description
15682 \begin_inset space ~
15689 ) This uses the program
15691 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15694 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15697 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15700 is a new engine, derived from
15704 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15705 access (see section
15706 \begin_inset space ~
15710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15712 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15717 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15718 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15723 \begin_layout Description
15725 \begin_inset space ~
15732 ) This uses the program
15737 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15743 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15744 font access (see section
15745 \begin_inset space ~
15749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15751 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15756 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15757 vertically written Japanese.
15760 \begin_layout Description
15762 \begin_inset space ~
15765 (cropped) This is the same as
15768 \begin_inset space ~
15773 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15774 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15775 to generate good-looking
15776 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15779 \begin_layout Description
15781 \begin_inset space ~
15784 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15788 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15792 \begin_layout Description
15794 \begin_inset space ~
15797 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15801 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15802 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15806 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15807 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15810 \begin_layout Standard
15814 \begin_inset space ~
15823 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15824 works without problems.
15825 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15826 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15830 \begin_inset space ~
15838 \begin_inset space ~
15843 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15853 \begin_inset Index idx
15856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15857 FileFormats ! XHTML
15863 \begin_inset Index idx
15866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15875 \begin_layout Standard
15876 This file type has the extension
15877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15889 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15890 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15891 When \SpecialChar LyX
15892 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15893 suitable for the purpose.
15894 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15897 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15900 between different formats, which are described in section
15902 Math Output in XHTML
15907 \begin_inset space ~
15915 \begin_layout Standard
15916 XHTML output remains
15917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15924 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15925 features are supported yet.
15929 and the World Wide Web
15933 Additional Features
15935 manual, for more information.
15938 \begin_layout Standard
15939 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15941 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15942 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15948 \begin_layout Subsection
15950 \begin_inset Index idx
15953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15962 \begin_layout Standard
15963 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15964 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15973 or use the toolbar button
15980 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15981 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
15982 \begin_inset space ~
15986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15988 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15992 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15994 \begin_inset space ~
15998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16000 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16005 Further output formats can be selected via
16007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16008 View (Other Formats)
16010 or the toolbar button
16019 \begin_layout Standard
16020 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16021 viewer window using the menu
16023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16029 Update (Other Formats)
16034 \begin_layout Standard
16035 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16038 To have a real output, export your document.
16041 \begin_layout Section
16042 A few Words about Typography
16043 \begin_inset Index idx
16046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16055 \begin_layout Subsection
16056 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16057 \begin_inset Index idx
16060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16067 \begin_inset Index idx
16070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16079 \begin_layout Standard
16080 In \SpecialChar LyX
16082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16093 symbol comes in four variants: the
16110 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16116 \begin_layout Standard
16117 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16127 height_special "totalheight"
16132 backgroundcolor "none"
16135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16136 \begin_inset Tabular
16137 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16138 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16139 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16140 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16141 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16142 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16143 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16171 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16172 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16211 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16212 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16234 system key combination
16238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16239 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16251 and the em dash with
16254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16267 is the Mac label for the right
16276 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16280 \begin_inset space ~
16283 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16295 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16296 and 2014 for the en dash).
16302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16315 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16316 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16338 system key combination or
16339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16353 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16366 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16405 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16411 \begin_layout Standard
16412 Dashes can also be inserted with
16414 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16416 \begin_inset space ~
16419 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16434 \begin_layout Standard
16435 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16436 mode and has a length of its own.
16437 Here are some examples:
16440 \begin_layout Enumerate
16441 line- and page-breaks
16442 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16452 \begin_layout Enumerate
16454 \begin_inset space ~
16458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16468 \begin_layout Enumerate
16469 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16470 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16480 \begin_layout Enumerate
16481 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16485 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16495 \begin_layout Standard
16497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16499 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16500 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16508 \begin_layout Subsection
16509 Dashes and line breaks
16510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16512 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16519 \begin_layout Standard
16520 Whether line breaks around dashes are allowed depends on the use case and
16524 \begin_layout Itemize
16525 No line breaks are allowed in ranges of values like A–Z or 1975–1982.
16528 \begin_layout Itemize
16529 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16533 \begin_layout Itemize
16534 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16535 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16538 \begin_layout Standard
16539 When using spaced en dashes
16540 \begin_inset space ~
16543 - common in British English
16544 \begin_inset space ~
16547 - line breaks before the dash can be prevented with protected spaces.
16550 \begin_layout Standard
16551 When using em dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16552 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16554 optional line breaks with the menu
16556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16557 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16558 Optional line break
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 For documents containing many em dashes, you may consider to select the
16567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16568 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16569 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16570 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
16573 This forces the output of dashes as
16574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16589 when exporting to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16591 The \SpecialChar TeX
16592 font ligature mechanism converts them to dash characters followed
16593 by an optional line break.
16596 \begin_layout Standard
16600 \begin_layout Enumerate
16601 This results in optional line breaks after
16606 Incorrect line breaks must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16613 Prevent Hyphenation
16618 \begin_inset space ~
16634 in \SpecialChar TeX
16640 \begin_layout Itemize
16642 \begin_inset space ~
16646 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16656 height_special "totalheight"
16661 backgroundcolor "none"
16664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16673 \begin_layout Itemize
16677 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16687 height_special "totalheight"
16692 backgroundcolor "none"
16695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16699 \begin_inset space ~
16707 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16708 \begin_inset space ~
16711 – sont très utiles.
16714 \begin_layout Itemize
16721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16730 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16733 \begin_layout Standard
16734 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16735 \begin_inset space ~
16738 – in contrast to an overfull line
16739 \begin_inset space ~
16742 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16747 \begin_layout Enumerate
16748 The setting is ignored for documents using non-\SpecialChar TeX
16753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16759 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16762 The default causes dashes to behave like ligature dashes.
16763 The usual behaviour of literal dashes can be achieved by inserting
16768 XeTeXdashbreakstate=0
16771 into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16780 \begin_layout Enumerate
16796 \begin_layout Enumerate
16797 Hyphenation is suppressed in words adjacent to hyphens and ligature dashes.
16800 \begin_layout Standard
16801 Since \SpecialChar LyX
16803 \begin_inset space ~
16806 2.2, -- and --- are exported to LaTeX as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent ligation
16811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16812 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16814 \begin_inset space ~
16817 2.1, -- and --- was output unchanged which led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
16819 export, HTML export and the PDF export.
16824 Occurrences in older documents are converted to literal Unicode dashes.
16825 This led to different line breaks in some documents.
16828 \begin_inset space ~
16831 2.3 provides the option
16833 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16838 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16842 It is on by default but unselected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16844 \begin_inset space ~
16848 \begin_inset Newline newline
16851 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
16855 \begin_layout Itemize
16856 If you used literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16858 \begin_inset space ~
16861 2.2 documents, you must manually unselect
16863 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16865 to ensure unchanged behavior.
16869 \begin_layout Itemize
16870 If you used both, literal and ligature dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16872 \begin_inset space ~
16875 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
16876 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behaviour.
16879 \begin_layout Itemize
16880 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
16881 documents that follow literal
16882 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
16884 \begin_inset space ~
16888 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16889 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
16891 \begin_inset space ~
16894 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
16897 \begin_layout Subsection
16899 \begin_inset Index idx
16902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16911 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16918 \begin_layout Standard
16919 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16920 but automatically in the output.
16921 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16927 \begin_inset Index idx
16930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16937 following the rules of the document language.
16940 \begin_layout Standard
16942 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16946 font and with unusual constructs, like
16947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16955 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16956 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16957 This is done with the menu
16959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16960 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16962 \begin_inset space ~
16968 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16970 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16974 \begin_layout Standard
16975 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16976 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16987 would then see the hyphen
16988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16995 as a hyphenation possibility.
16996 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16997 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17001 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17004 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17006 Prevent Hyphenation
17011 \begin_inset space ~
17019 \begin_layout Subsection
17021 \begin_inset Index idx
17024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17034 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17037 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17044 \begin_layout Standard
17045 When \SpecialChar LyX
17046 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17047 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17049 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17055 appropriate amount of space.
17056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17059 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17061 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17062 gets after another word.
17065 \begin_layout Standard
17066 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17067 not work in all cases.
17069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17080 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17081 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17084 \begin_layout Standard
17085 Here are some examples of
17089 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17092 \begin_layout Itemize
17097 \begin_layout Itemize
17102 \begin_layout Standard
17103 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17106 \begin_layout Itemize
17108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17112 this is too much space!
17115 \begin_layout Itemize
17120 \begin_layout Standard
17121 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17124 \begin_layout Standard
17125 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17128 \begin_layout Enumerate
17132 \begin_inset space ~
17137 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17138 \begin_inset space ~
17142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17144 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17149 \begin_inset Index idx
17152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17153 Spaces ! inter-word
17161 \begin_layout Enumerate
17165 \begin_inset space ~
17170 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17171 \begin_inset space ~
17175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17177 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17182 \begin_inset Index idx
17185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17194 \begin_layout Enumerate
17198 \begin_inset space ~
17202 \begin_inset space ~
17206 \begin_inset space ~
17213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17215 \begin_inset space ~
17220 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17221 This function is also bound to
17224 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17230 \begin_layout Standard
17231 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17234 \begin_layout Itemize
17236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17240 \begin_inset space \space{}
17243 this is too much space!
17246 \begin_layout Itemize
17247 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17251 \begin_layout Standard
17252 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17253 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17255 will take care of this.
17258 \begin_layout Standard
17259 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17263 \begin_inset space ~
17269 feature described in the section
17271 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17276 Additional Features
17281 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17283 \begin_inset Index idx
17286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17287 Typography ! Quotation marks
17293 \begin_inset Index idx
17296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17297 Quotation marks | see
17301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17327 \begin_layout Standard
17329 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17330 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17331 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17341 The keyboard character,
17345 , generates this automatically.
17348 \begin_layout Standard
17349 You can specify what character the
17353 key produces by using the submenu
17359 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17363 \begin_inset Index idx
17366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17367 Document ! Settings
17372 dialog and switching the
17376 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17377 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17379 \begin_inset space ~
17385 \begin_layout Labeling
17386 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17398 \begin_inset space ~
17402 \begin_inset space ~
17406 \begin_inset Quotes els
17410 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17424 \begin_inset Quotes els
17428 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17431 quotation marks (as common, e.
17432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17438 \begin_layout Labeling
17439 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17442 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17446 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17450 \begin_inset space ~
17454 \begin_inset space ~
17458 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17462 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17468 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17472 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17476 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17480 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17483 quotation marks (as common, e.
17484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17490 \begin_layout Labeling
17491 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17494 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17498 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17502 \begin_inset space ~
17506 \begin_inset space ~
17510 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17514 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17520 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17524 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17528 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17532 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17535 quotation marks (as common, e.
17536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17542 \begin_layout Labeling
17543 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17546 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17550 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17554 \begin_inset space ~
17558 \begin_inset space ~
17562 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17566 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17572 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17576 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17580 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17584 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17587 quotation marks (as common, e.
17588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17594 \begin_layout Labeling
17595 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17598 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17602 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17606 \begin_inset space ~
17610 \begin_inset space ~
17614 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17618 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17624 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17628 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17632 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17636 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17639 quotation marks (as common, e.
17640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17643 g., in Switzerland)
17646 \begin_layout Labeling
17647 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17650 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17654 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17658 \begin_inset space ~
17662 \begin_inset space ~
17666 \begin_inset Quotes als
17670 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17676 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17680 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17684 \begin_inset Quotes als
17688 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17691 quotation marks (as common, e.
17692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17698 \begin_layout Labeling
17699 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17702 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17706 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17710 \begin_inset space ~
17714 \begin_inset space ~
17718 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17722 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17728 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17732 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17736 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17740 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17743 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17746 \begin_layout Labeling
17747 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17750 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17754 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17758 \begin_inset space ~
17762 \begin_inset space ~
17766 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17770 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17776 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17780 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17784 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17788 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17791 quotation marks (as common, e.
17792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17795 g., in Great Britain)
17798 \begin_layout Labeling
17799 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17802 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17806 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17810 \begin_inset space ~
17814 \begin_inset space ~
17818 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17822 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17828 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17832 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17836 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17840 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17843 quotation marks (as common, e.
17844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17850 \begin_layout Labeling
17851 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17854 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17858 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17862 \begin_inset space ~
17866 \begin_inset space ~
17870 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17874 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17880 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17884 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17888 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17892 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17895 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17900 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17901 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17902 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17903 the inner marks differ).
17911 \begin_layout Labeling
17912 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17915 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17919 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17923 \begin_inset space ~
17927 \begin_inset space ~
17931 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17935 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17941 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17945 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17949 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17953 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17956 quotation marks (as common, e.
17957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17963 \begin_layout Labeling
17964 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17967 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17971 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17975 \begin_inset space ~
17979 \begin_inset space ~
17983 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17987 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17993 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17997 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18001 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18005 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18008 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18011 \begin_layout Labeling
18012 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18013 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18021 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18027 \begin_inset space ~
18031 \begin_inset space ~
18037 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18045 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18049 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18053 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18057 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18061 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18064 quotation marks (as common, e.
18065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18073 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18074 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18082 \begin_layout Labeling
18083 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18084 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18092 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18098 \begin_inset space ~
18102 \begin_inset space ~
18108 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18116 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18120 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18124 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18128 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18132 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18135 quotation marks (as common, e.
18136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18139 g., in North Korea and China)
18143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18144 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18145 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18153 \begin_layout Standard
18154 Inner quotation marks
18158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18159 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18160 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18161 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18169 does not necessarily mean
18170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18178 This is why we call them
18179 \begin_inset Quotes els
18183 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18199 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18201 \begin_inset Quotes els
18205 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18208 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18211 arg "quote-insert inner"
18216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18222 \begin_layout Standard
18223 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18224 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18225 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18226 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18227 If you check the setting
18229 Use dynamic quotation marks
18233 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18234 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18237 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18238 they appear in a special color).
18239 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18240 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18245 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18248 \begin_layout Standard
18249 Individual quotation marks (i.
18250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18253 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18254 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18258 \begin_layout Subsection
18260 \begin_inset Index idx
18263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18264 Typography ! Ligatures
18270 \begin_inset Index idx
18273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18304 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18311 \begin_layout Standard
18312 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18313 print them as single characters.
18314 These groups are known as
18319 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18320 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18322 Here are the standard ligatures:
18325 \begin_layout Itemize
18329 \begin_layout Itemize
18333 \begin_layout Itemize
18337 \begin_layout Itemize
18341 \begin_layout Itemize
18345 \begin_layout Standard
18346 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18349 \begin_layout Standard
18350 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18351 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18359 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18375 To break a ligature, use
18377 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18378 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18380 \begin_inset space ~
18387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18398 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18415 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18423 \begin_layout Subsection
18425 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18427 \begin_inset Index idx
18430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18440 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18447 \begin_layout Standard
18450 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18451 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18455 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18458 \begin_layout Description
18460 The name of the game.
18463 \begin_layout Description
18465 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18469 \begin_layout Description
18471 The \SpecialChar TeX
18472 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18476 \begin_layout Description
18477 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18478 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18482 \begin_layout Standard
18483 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18489 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18497 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18498 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18499 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18500 converges to the number
18501 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18504 : The actual version is
18505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18513 , the previous one was
18514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18525 \begin_layout Subsection
18527 \begin_inset Index idx
18530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18539 \begin_layout Standard
18540 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18541 space between two words.
18542 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18552 for units use the menu
18554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18555 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18557 \begin_inset space ~
18565 arg "space-insert thin"
18571 \begin_layout Standard
18572 Here is an example to show the differences:
18575 \begin_layout Standard
18576 \begin_inset Tabular
18577 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18578 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18579 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18580 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18587 \begin_inset space ~
18591 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18603 space between number and unit
18610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18619 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18631 half space between number and unit
18644 \begin_layout Subsection
18646 \begin_inset Index idx
18649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18650 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18658 \begin_layout Standard
18659 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18661 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18662 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18663 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18664 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18665 These bits of text became known as
18676 \begin_layout Standard
18677 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18678 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18679 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18680 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18681 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18682 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18683 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18684 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18685 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18686 \begin_inset Newline newline
18694 \begin_inset Newline newline
18702 \begin_inset Newline newline
18705 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18706 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18707 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18709 \begin_inset space ~
18713 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18715 key "latexcompanion"
18721 \begin_inset space ~
18725 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18732 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18733 's page break mechanism.
18736 \begin_layout Chapter
18737 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18740 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18747 \begin_layout Standard
18748 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18757 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18760 \begin_layout Section
18762 \begin_inset Index idx
18765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18781 \begin_layout Standard
18783 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18786 \begin_layout Description
18789 \begin_inset space ~
18792 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18793 \begin_inset Newline newline
18797 \begin_inset Note Note
18800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18801 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18809 \begin_layout Description
18810 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18811 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18812 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18815 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18816 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18818 \begin_inset space ~
18824 \begin_inset Newline newline
18828 \begin_inset Note Comment
18831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18841 \begin_layout Description
18843 \begin_inset space ~
18846 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18847 set in the document settings under
18849 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18851 \begin_inset space ~
18857 \begin_inset Newline newline
18861 \begin_inset Newline newline
18865 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18874 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18875 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18880 of a comment that appears in the output.
18886 \begin_inset Newline newline
18890 \begin_inset Newline newline
18893 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18896 \begin_layout Standard
18897 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18909 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18912 \begin_layout Section
18914 \begin_inset Index idx
18917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18926 name "sec:Footnotes"
18933 \begin_layout Standard
18935 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18938 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18941 or the toolbar button
18944 arg "footnote-insert"
18956 \begin_inset Graphics
18957 filename clipart/footnote.png
18966 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18967 's representation of your footnote.
18977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18996 label, the box will
19000 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19001 Clicking on the box label again will close
19014 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19015 and click on the footnote
19030 \begin_layout Standard
19031 Here is an example footnote:
19039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19040 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19048 \begin_layout Standard
19049 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19050 position where the footnote box is placed.
19051 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19052 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19053 according to the document class.
19055 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19056 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19062 ey are described in the
19065 \begin_inset space ~
19073 \begin_layout Section
19075 \begin_inset Index idx
19078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19087 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19094 \begin_layout Standard
19095 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19097 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19101 \begin_inset space ~
19106 or the toolbar button
19109 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19135 appearing within your text.
19136 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19137 's representation of your margin
19146 \begin_layout Standard
19147 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19151 \begin_inset Marginal
19154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19156 This is a marginal note.
19164 \begin_layout Standard
19165 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19166 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19167 pages, right on odd pages.
19170 \begin_layout Standard
19171 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19174 \begin_inset space ~
19182 \begin_inset space ~
19190 \begin_layout Section
19191 Graphics and Images
19192 \begin_inset Index idx
19195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19202 \begin_inset Index idx
19205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19214 name "sec:Graphics"
19221 \begin_layout Standard
19222 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19223 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19226 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19235 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19238 \begin_layout Standard
19239 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19244 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19245 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19247 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19248 \begin_inset space ~
19252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19254 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19261 \begin_layout Standard
19266 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19267 of the image in the output.
19268 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19272 \begin_inset space ~
19276 \begin_inset space ~
19285 \begin_inset space ~
19289 \begin_inset space ~
19293 \begin_inset space ~
19298 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19299 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19307 \begin_layout Standard
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_inset space ~
19320 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19321 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19323 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19328 \begin_inset space ~
19333 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19334 with the image size is printed.
19337 \begin_layout Standard
19338 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19339 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19341 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19344 \begin_layout Standard
19346 \begin_inset Graphics
19347 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19355 \begin_layout Standard
19356 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19357 the image into a float, see section
19358 \begin_inset space ~
19362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19364 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19371 \begin_layout Subsection
19373 \begin_inset Index idx
19376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19385 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19392 \begin_layout Standard
19393 You can insert images in any known file format.
19394 But as we explained in section
19395 \begin_inset space ~
19399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19401 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19405 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19407 therefore uses the program
19411 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19412 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19413 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19414 \begin_inset space ~
19418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19420 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19427 \begin_layout Standard
19428 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19431 \begin_layout Description
19433 \begin_inset space ~
19436 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19437 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19438 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19442 Graphics Interchange Format
19443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19446 (GIF, file extension
19447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19459 \begin_inset Index idx
19462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19494 Portable Network Graphics
19495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19498 (PNG, file extension
19499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19511 \begin_inset Index idx
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19546 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19550 (JPG, file extension
19551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19575 \begin_inset Index idx
19578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19609 \begin_layout Description
19611 \begin_inset space ~
19614 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19616 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19617 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19618 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19619 \begin_inset Newline newline
19622 Scalable image formats can be
19623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19626 Scalable Vector Graphics
19627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19630 (SVG, file extension
19631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19643 \begin_inset Index idx
19646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19678 Encapsulated PostScript
19679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19682 (EPS, file extension
19683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19695 \begin_inset Index idx
19698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19730 Portable Document Format
19731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19734 (PDF, file extension
19735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19747 \begin_inset Index idx
19750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19765 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19766 result will not be scalable.
19767 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19773 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19781 \begin_layout Standard
19782 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19789 \begin_layout Subsection
19790 Grouping of Image Settings
19791 \begin_inset Index idx
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19795 Images ! Settings grouping
19803 \begin_layout Standard
19804 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19806 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19807 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19809 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19810 need to manually change each of them.
19814 \begin_layout Standard
19815 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19818 \begin_inset space ~
19822 \begin_inset space ~
19834 \begin_inset space ~
19838 \begin_inset space ~
19844 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19845 and checking the name of the desired group.
19848 \begin_layout Section
19850 \begin_inset Index idx
19853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19869 \begin_layout Standard
19870 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19873 arg "tabular-insert"
19878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19882 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19883 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19884 from the rest of the table.
19885 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19886 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19888 Here is an example table:
19891 \begin_layout Standard
19893 \begin_inset Tabular
19894 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19895 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19896 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19897 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19898 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19899 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20099 \begin_layout Subsection
20103 \begin_layout Standard
20104 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20107 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20111 This brings up the table dialog.
20112 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20113 cursor is placed currently.
20114 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20115 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20116 done on all of your selection.
20119 \begin_layout Standard
20120 In addition to the table dialog, the
20123 \begin_inset space ~
20128 helps you in setting table properties.
20129 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20132 \begin_layout Standard
20136 \begin_inset space ~
20141 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20142 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20143 current cell respectively.
20144 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20146 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20147 of text, see section
20148 \begin_inset space ~
20152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20154 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20161 \begin_layout Standard
20162 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20163 using the check box
20172 This will merge the cells to
20176 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20177 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20178 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20179 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20180 in the last row without the upper border:
20183 \begin_layout Standard
20185 \begin_inset Tabular
20186 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20187 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20189 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20202 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20211 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20322 \begin_layout Standard
20323 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20324 -arguments for the table.
20325 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20326 explained in the chapter
20333 \begin_inset space ~
20339 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20340 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20341 but are visible in the output.
20344 \begin_layout Standard
20345 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20353 Most DVI-viewers are
20357 able to display rotations.
20365 \begin_layout Standard
20370 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20375 adds lines for all cell borders.
20378 \begin_layout Subsection
20380 \begin_inset Index idx
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20384 Tables ! Multi-page
20390 \begin_inset Index idx
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 \begin_layout Standard
20403 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20406 \begin_inset space ~
20410 \begin_inset space ~
20418 \begin_inset space ~
20423 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20424 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20427 \begin_layout Description
20432 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20433 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20434 Except for the first page, if
20437 \begin_inset space ~
20445 \begin_layout Description
20449 \begin_inset space ~
20454 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20455 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20458 \begin_layout Description
20463 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20464 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20465 except for the last page, if
20468 \begin_inset space ~
20476 \begin_layout Description
20480 \begin_inset space ~
20485 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20486 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20489 \begin_layout Description
20490 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20491 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20497 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20500 \begin_inset space ~
20508 \begin_layout Standard
20509 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20510 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20511 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20517 In this context, first means first in this order:
20520 \begin_inset space ~
20532 \begin_inset space ~
20537 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20540 \begin_layout Standard
20542 \begin_inset Tabular
20543 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20544 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20545 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20546 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20547 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20548 <row endfirsthead="true">
20549 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20560 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20569 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20579 <row endfirsthead="true">
20580 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20600 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20612 <row endhead="true">
20613 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20624 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20643 <row endhead="true">
20644 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20655 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 <row endfoot="true">
20677 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21669 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21678 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21687 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21698 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21729 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21760 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21853 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21915 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21946 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21977 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22039 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22070 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22163 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22194 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22256 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22318 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22349 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22504 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22566 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22628 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22658 <row endlastfoot="true">
22659 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22670 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 \begin_layout Subsection
22698 \begin_inset Index idx
22701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22710 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22717 \begin_layout Standard
22718 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22719 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22720 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22721 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22725 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22728 \begin_layout Standard
22729 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22730 for the column in the table dialog.
22731 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22732 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22736 \begin_layout Standard
22738 \begin_inset Tabular
22739 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22740 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22741 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22742 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22743 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22763 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22832 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22888 This is longer now.
22893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22944 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22945 This is longer now.
22950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22976 \begin_layout Standard
22977 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22978 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22983 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22984 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22990 Selection with the mouse or with
22994 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22995 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22996 the selection from outside the table.
22999 \begin_layout Section
23001 \begin_inset Index idx
23004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23020 \begin_layout Subsection
23024 \begin_layout Standard
23025 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23026 have a fixed location.
23028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23035 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23043 \begin_inset space ~
23048 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23049 too many notes on the current page.
23052 \begin_layout Standard
23053 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23054 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23055 and pages without text.
23056 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23057 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23058 Floats are therefore numbered.
23059 Referencing is described in section
23060 \begin_inset space ~
23064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23066 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23073 \begin_layout Standard
23074 To insert a float, use the menu
23076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23080 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23081 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23083 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23084 \begin_inset Index idx
23087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23093 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23094 paragraph within the float.
23095 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23096 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23097 left-clicking on the box label.
23098 A closed float box looks like this:
23099 \begin_inset Graphics
23100 filename clipart/float.png
23105 – a gray button with a red label.
23108 \begin_layout Standard
23109 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23111 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23114 \begin_layout Subsection
23116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23118 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23123 \begin_inset Index idx
23126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23127 Floats ! Figure floats
23135 \begin_layout Standard
23137 \begin_inset space ~
23141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23143 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23147 was created using the menu
23149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23150 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23156 arg "float-insert figure"
23160 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23163 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23169 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23173 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23174 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23176 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23178 \begin_inset space ~
23186 arg "layout-paragraph"
23192 \begin_layout Standard
23193 \begin_inset Float figure
23198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 \begin_inset Graphics
23201 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23211 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23216 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23220 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23233 \begin_layout Standard
23234 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23235 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23246 ) and refer to it using the menu
23248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23254 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23258 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23259 vague references like
23260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23267 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23268 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23278 For more about cross-references, see section
23279 \begin_inset space ~
23283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23285 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23292 \begin_layout Standard
23293 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23294 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23295 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23296 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23297 as described in section
23298 \begin_inset space ~
23302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23304 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23310 \begin_inset space ~
23314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23316 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23320 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23321 You can also set the images one below the other.
23323 \begin_inset space ~
23327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23329 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23336 reference "fig:Platypus"
23340 are the subfigures.
23343 \begin_layout Standard
23344 \begin_inset Float figure
23349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23354 \begin_inset Float figure
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23360 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23365 name "fig:Undefinable"
23377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23378 \begin_inset Graphics
23379 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23390 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23394 \begin_inset Float figure
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23405 name "fig:Platypus"
23417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 \begin_inset Graphics
23419 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23443 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23447 Two distorted images.
23460 \begin_layout Subsection
23462 \begin_inset Index idx
23465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23466 Floats ! Table floats
23474 \begin_layout Standard
23475 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23478 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23481 or the toolbar button
23484 arg "float-insert table"
23488 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23489 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23490 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23492 \begin_inset space ~
23496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23498 reference "tab:Table-float"
23505 \begin_layout Standard
23506 \begin_inset Float table
23511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23512 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23517 name "tab:Table-float"
23529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 \begin_inset Tabular
23532 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23533 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23534 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23535 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23536 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23663 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23687 \end{array}\right]$
23695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23729 \begin_layout Subsection
23731 \begin_inset Index idx
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23743 \begin_layout Standard
23745 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23746 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23747 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23749 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23757 \begin_inset space ~
23765 \begin_layout Section
23767 \begin_inset Index idx
23770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 \begin_layout Standard
23781 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23783 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23784 \begin_inset space \space{}
23791 \begin_layout Standard
23792 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23793 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23799 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23800 and its alignment within the page.
23803 \begin_layout Standard
23805 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23815 height_special "totalheight"
23820 backgroundcolor "none"
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23826 This is a minipage.
23827 The text is set in an italic style.
23830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23833 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23834 another formatting.
23842 \begin_layout Standard
23843 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23846 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23850 as described in section
23851 \begin_inset space ~
23855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23857 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23862 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23868 \begin_layout Standard
23869 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23879 height_special "totalheight"
23884 backgroundcolor "none"
23887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23888 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23889 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23895 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23899 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23909 height_special "totalheight"
23914 backgroundcolor "none"
23917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23919 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23927 \begin_layout Standard
23928 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23934 \begin_layout Standard
23935 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23937 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23944 \begin_inset space ~
23952 \begin_layout Chapter
23953 Mathematical Formulas
23954 \begin_inset Index idx
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23964 \begin_inset Index idx
23967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23998 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24005 \begin_layout Standard
24006 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24011 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24014 \begin_layout Section
24016 \begin_inset Index idx
24019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 \begin_layout Standard
24029 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24042 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24044 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24045 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24046 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24048 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24054 \begin_layout Standard
24055 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24059 \begin_inset space ~
24064 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24067 \begin_layout Standard
24068 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24069 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24072 \begin_layout Standard
24073 This is a line with an inline formula
24074 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24080 \begin_layout Standard
24081 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24082 paragraph, like this one:
24083 \begin_inset Formula
24090 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24093 \begin_layout Standard
24095 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24097 For example, typing
24098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24111 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24112 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24116 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24119 \begin_inset space ~
24127 \begin_layout Subsection
24128 Navigating in Formulas
24129 \begin_inset Index idx
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24141 \begin_layout Standard
24142 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24143 achieved with the arrow keys.
24145 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24146 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24151 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24152 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24156 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24160 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24163 \end{array}\right]$
24171 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24176 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24177 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24180 \begin_layout Standard
24185 , printed in this document as
24186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24190 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24197 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24198 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24199 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24204 For example, if you want
24205 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24213 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24223 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24227 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24232 , since in the latter case only the
24235 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24240 will be under the square root sign:
24241 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24247 \begin_layout Standard
24248 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24250 \begin_inset Formula
24252 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24261 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24262 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24265 \begin_layout Subsection
24269 \begin_layout Standard
24270 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24271 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24275 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24276 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24277 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24278 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24279 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24283 \begin_layout Subsection
24284 Exponents and Subscripts
24285 \begin_inset Index idx
24288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24295 \begin_inset Index idx
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24307 \begin_layout Standard
24308 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24311 arg "math-superscript"
24317 arg "math-subscript"
24320 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24322 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24325 , type in a formula
24328 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24338 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24344 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24348 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24354 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24360 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24369 , you have to use an extra
24373 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24374 For example, if you want
24375 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24381 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24387 Subscripts are similar: To get
24388 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24394 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24402 \begin_layout Subsection
24404 \begin_inset Index idx
24407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24416 \begin_layout Standard
24417 Create a fraction either with the command
24423 or by using the icon
24426 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24432 \begin_inset space ~
24438 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24439 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24440 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24445 To move back up, press
24450 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24451 \begin_inset Formula
24453 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24456 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24464 \begin_layout Subsection
24466 \begin_inset Index idx
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24478 \begin_layout Standard
24479 Roots can be created using the
24482 \begin_inset space ~
24490 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24496 arg "math-insert \\root"
24518 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24524 always produces a square root.
24527 \begin_layout Subsection
24528 Operators with Limits
24529 \begin_inset Index idx
24532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24539 \begin_inset Index idx
24542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24551 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24558 \begin_layout Standard
24560 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24564 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24567 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24568 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24569 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24570 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24571 The sum operator will automatically place its
24572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24579 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24581 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24585 \begin_inset Formula
24587 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24592 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24596 \begin_layout Standard
24597 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24599 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24600 behind the operator and using the menu
24602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24603 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24605 \begin_inset space ~
24609 \begin_inset space ~
24623 \begin_layout Standard
24624 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24633 \begin_inset Index idx
24636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24643 \begin_inset Formula
24645 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24650 which will place the
24651 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24663 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24664 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24670 \begin_layout Standard
24671 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24678 Have a look at section
24679 \begin_inset space ~
24683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24685 reference "subsec:Functions"
24689 for an explanation of function macros.
24692 \begin_layout Subsection
24694 \begin_inset Index idx
24697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24706 \begin_layout Standard
24707 Most math symbols can be found in the
24710 \begin_inset space ~
24715 under one of several categories; including
24732 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24736 \begin_layout Standard
24737 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24738 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24739 don't have to use the
24742 \begin_inset space ~
24747 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24749 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24752 \begin_layout Subsection
24754 \begin_inset Index idx
24757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24766 \begin_layout Standard
24767 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24773 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24779 \begin_inset space ~
24787 arg "math-insert \\space"
24791 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24792 For example, the sequence
24797 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24800 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24802 \begin_inset Graphics
24803 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24808 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24809 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24810 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24811 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24812 , because they are negative
24814 Here are two examples:
24817 \begin_layout Standard
24827 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24833 \begin_layout Standard
24843 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24849 \begin_layout Subsection
24851 \begin_inset Index idx
24854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24863 name "subsec:Functions"
24870 \begin_layout Standard
24874 \begin_inset space ~
24879 contains under the button
24882 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24885 a number of function macros, such as
24886 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24890 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24898 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24905 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24906 avoid confusions, because
24907 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24911 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24917 \begin_layout Standard
24918 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24920 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24924 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24930 \begin_layout Standard
24931 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24932 are placed, as described in section
24933 \begin_inset space ~
24937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24939 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24946 \begin_layout Subsection
24948 \begin_inset Index idx
24951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24960 \begin_layout Standard
24961 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24963 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24964 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24965 commands, for example, to enter
24966 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24969 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24970 Our example is entered by typing
24975 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24982 \begin_inset space ~
24986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24988 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24992 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24995 \begin_layout Standard
24996 \begin_inset Float table
25001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25002 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25007 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25011 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25021 \begin_inset Tabular
25022 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25023 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25024 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25025 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25026 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25110 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25164 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25218 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25272 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25380 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25434 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25488 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25542 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25587 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25608 \begin_layout Standard
25609 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25612 \begin_inset space ~
25620 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25623 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25627 \begin_layout Section
25628 Brackets and Delimiters
25629 \begin_inset Index idx
25632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25639 \begin_inset Index idx
25642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25651 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25658 \begin_layout Standard
25659 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25661 For some purposes, using just the keys
25666 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25667 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25668 toolbar delimiter icon
25671 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25675 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25676 \begin_inset Formula
25678 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25686 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25687 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25691 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25694 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25700 \begin_inset Formula
25702 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25710 \begin_layout Standard
25711 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25712 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25716 \begin_layout Standard
25717 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25718 left side and right side.
25719 If you use the option
25722 \begin_inset space ~
25727 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25728 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25730 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25735 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25736 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25739 \begin_layout Standard
25740 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25741 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25742 is to go inside the brackets.
25743 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25748 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25749 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25750 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25754 arg "math-delim ( )"
25760 \begin_layout Section
25761 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25762 \begin_inset Index idx
25765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25772 \begin_inset Index idx
25775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25782 \begin_inset Index idx
25785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25786 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25794 \begin_layout Standard
25795 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25799 \begin_inset space ~
25807 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25811 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25812 Here is an example:
25813 \begin_inset Formula
25815 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25824 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25825 \begin_inset space ~
25829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25831 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25836 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25837 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25838 This alignment is set in the box
25843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25892 for every column as default.
25893 For example, the sequence
25894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25905 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25906 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25907 corresponds to the relevant column.
25908 The result will look like this:
25909 \begin_inset Formula
25912 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25913 column & has & has\,right\\
25914 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25923 \begin_layout Standard
25924 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25927 arg "newline-insert newline"
25930 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25931 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25933 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25936 or the math toolbar.
25939 \begin_layout Standard
25940 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25941 It can be created with the menu
25943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25944 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25946 \begin_inset space ~
25958 Here is an example:
25959 \begin_inset Formula
25973 \begin_layout Standard
25974 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25977 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25980 arg "newline-insert newline"
25984 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25989 arg "newline-insert newline"
25992 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26000 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26001 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26002 A new row is created by every further entry of
26005 arg "newline-insert newline"
26009 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26010 Here is an example:
26011 \begin_inset Formula
26013 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26014 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26019 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26020 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26021 \begin_inset Formula
26023 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26031 \begin_layout Standard
26032 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26039 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26040 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26043 reference "eq:asquared"
26048 The other types are described in section
26049 \begin_inset space ~
26053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26055 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26062 \begin_layout Section
26063 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26064 \begin_inset Index idx
26067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26068 Math ! Formula numbering
26074 \begin_inset Index idx
26077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26078 Math ! Referencing formulas
26084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26086 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26093 \begin_layout Standard
26094 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26096 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26097 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26099 \begin_inset space ~
26103 \begin_inset space ~
26111 arg "math-number-toggle"
26115 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26116 within parentheses.
26117 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26118 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26119 the document class.
26120 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26121 separated by a dot:
26122 \begin_inset Formula
26132 arg "math-number-toggle"
26135 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26136 You can only number displayed formulas.
26139 \begin_layout Standard
26140 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26142 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26143 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26145 \begin_inset space ~
26149 \begin_inset space ~
26157 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26160 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26161 \begin_inset Formula
26164 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26170 To number all lines use the shortcut
26173 arg "math-number-toggle"
26179 \begin_layout Standard
26180 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26183 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26184 A label is inserted with the menu
26186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26195 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26196 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26197 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26209 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26210 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26211 We inserted in the following example the label
26212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26219 in the second line:
26220 \begin_inset Formula
26222 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26223 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26228 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26229 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26230 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26234 \begin_inset space ~
26242 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26246 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26247 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26248 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26249 as the formula number:
26252 \begin_layout Standard
26253 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26256 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26263 \begin_layout Standard
26264 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26265 's cross-reference box are described in section
26266 \begin_inset space ~
26270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26272 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26277 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26285 \begin_layout Section
26286 User defined math macros
26287 \begin_inset Index idx
26290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26299 \begin_layout Standard
26301 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26302 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26303 Math macros are explained in section
26306 \begin_inset space ~
26318 \begin_layout Section
26322 \begin_layout Subsection
26324 \begin_inset Index idx
26327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26336 \begin_layout Standard
26337 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26338 To set a font in a formula, use the
26341 \begin_inset space ~
26349 arg "math-insert \\font"
26352 , or enter its command, listed in table
26353 \begin_inset space ~
26357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26359 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26366 \begin_layout Standard
26367 \begin_inset Float table
26372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26373 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26378 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26382 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26392 \begin_inset Tabular
26393 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26394 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26396 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26428 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26455 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26482 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26515 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26542 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26569 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26603 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26630 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26664 \begin_layout Standard
26665 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26673 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26689 \begin_layout Standard
26690 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26691 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26696 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26697 space when you need a space in the box.
26698 Here is an example where
26699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26710 denotes the set of numbers:
26711 \begin_inset Formula
26713 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26721 \begin_layout Standard
26722 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26723 You can, for example, put a character in
26732 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26736 \begin_inset Newline newline
26739 So it is better not to use this feature.
26742 \begin_layout Standard
26743 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26744 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26748 \begin_inset Newline newline
26751 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26757 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26758 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26764 \begin_layout Standard
26771 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26774 \begin_layout Standard
26775 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26777 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26778 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26780 \begin_inset space ~
26788 \begin_layout Subsection
26790 \begin_inset Index idx
26793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26802 \begin_layout Standard
26803 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26805 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26809 \begin_inset space ~
26813 \begin_inset space ~
26821 \begin_inset space ~
26829 arg "math-insert \\font"
26833 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26834 in black instead of blue.
26835 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26836 Here is an example:
26837 \begin_inset Formula
26840 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26841 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26850 \begin_layout Subsection
26852 \begin_inset Index idx
26855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26865 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26866 automatically chosen in most situations.
26884 For most characters,
26892 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26893 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26898 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26899 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26900 thinks are appropriate.
26901 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26904 arg "math-insert \\style"
26908 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26909 For example, you can set
26910 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26913 , which is normally in
26922 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26926 The four styles are used in the following example:
26929 \begin_layout Standard
26930 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26934 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26938 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26942 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26948 \begin_layout Standard
26949 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26950 is set in a particular size with the menu
26952 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26954 \begin_inset space ~
26959 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26960 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26961 will be adjusted to correspond.
26962 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26973 \begin_layout Standard
26977 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26983 \begin_layout Section
26984 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26986 \begin_inset Index idx
26989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26996 \begin_inset Index idx
26999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27008 \begin_layout Standard
27010 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27011 that are in common use.
27014 \begin_layout Subsection
27015 Enabling AMS-Support
27018 \begin_layout Standard
27019 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27020 the document by selecting the checkbox
27023 \begin_inset space ~
27027 \begin_inset space ~
27031 \begin_inset space ~
27038 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27042 \begin_inset Index idx
27045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27046 Document ! Settings
27054 \begin_inset space ~
27060 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27061 -errors in formulas,
27062 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27065 \begin_layout Subsection
27067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27069 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27074 \begin_inset Index idx
27077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27078 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27086 \begin_layout Standard
27087 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27088 provides a selection of different formula types.
27090 allows you to choose between
27111 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27112 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27119 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27122 \begin_layout Chapter
27126 \begin_layout Section
27128 \begin_inset Index idx
27131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27140 name "sec:Cross-References"
27147 \begin_layout Standard
27148 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27149 's strengths is cross-references.
27150 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27152 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27153 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27154 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27157 \begin_layout Enumerate
27161 \begin_layout Enumerate
27162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27164 name "enu:Second-item"
27171 \begin_layout Enumerate
27175 \begin_layout Standard
27176 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27181 or by pressing the toolbar button
27188 A gray label box like this:
27189 \begin_inset Graphics
27190 filename clipart/label.png
27194 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27196 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27231 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27232 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27248 \begin_layout Standard
27249 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27254 or the toolbar button
27257 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27261 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27262 \begin_inset Graphics
27263 filename clipart/reference.png
27267 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27269 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27282 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27286 \begin_layout Standard
27287 As an alternative to
27289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27292 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27297 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27298 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27300 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27312 \begin_layout Standard
27313 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27314 \begin_inset space ~
27318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27320 reference "enu:Second-item"
27327 \begin_layout Standard
27328 It is recommended to use a protected space
27332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27333 described in section
27334 \begin_inset space ~
27338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27340 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27349 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27350 line breaks between them.
27353 \begin_layout Standard
27354 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27357 \begin_layout Description
27358 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27361 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27368 \begin_layout Description
27369 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27370 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27382 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27389 \begin_layout Description
27390 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27391 \begin_inset space ~
27395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27396 LatexCommand pageref
27397 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27404 \begin_layout Description
27406 \begin_inset space ~
27410 \begin_inset space ~
27413 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27415 LatexCommand vpageref
27416 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27421 \begin_inset Newline newline
27424 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27425 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27426 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27427 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27428 it prints “on the next page”.
27429 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27432 \begin_layout Description
27434 \begin_inset space ~
27438 \begin_inset space ~
27442 \begin_inset space ~
27445 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27448 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27453 \begin_inset Newline newline
27456 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27462 ; otherwise it behaves like
27466 \begin_inset space ~
27470 \begin_inset space ~
27479 \begin_layout Description
27481 \begin_inset space ~
27484 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27485 \begin_inset Newline newline
27489 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27497 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27507 \begin_inset Index idx
27510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27512 packages ! prettyref
27518 \begin_inset Index idx
27521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27523 packages ! refstyle
27534 \begin_inset Newline newline
27537 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27538 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27541 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27545 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27546 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27554 is the default and preferred because
27558 supports only English documents.
27559 The format is specified by using the command
27571 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27572 preamble of the document.
27573 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27591 \begin_inset Newline newline
27598 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27603 \begin_inset Newline newline
27614 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27615 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27617 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27618 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27623 , you might do so as follows:
27624 \begin_inset Newline newline
27631 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27636 \begin_inset Newline newline
27639 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27640 the package documentation
27641 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27643 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27649 \begin_inset Newline newline
27660 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27667 \begin_layout Description
27669 \begin_inset space ~
27672 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27674 LatexCommand nameref
27675 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27682 \begin_layout Description
27684 \begin_inset space ~
27687 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27688 label for the reference:
27689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27690 LatexCommand labelonly
27691 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27696 \begin_inset Newline newline
27699 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27700 Code, if you want to issue a command
27701 that \SpecialChar LyX
27707 , then you may want to use the
27710 \begin_inset space ~
27715 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27725 This is the form needed for e.
27726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27730 \begin_inset space \space{}
27737 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27738 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27740 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27744 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27748 \begin_layout Standard
27749 You can only use the style
27753 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27757 is always possible.
27760 \begin_layout Standard
27761 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27762 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27764 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27765 \begin_inset space ~
27769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27771 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27778 \begin_layout Standard
27779 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27783 \begin_inset space ~
27787 \begin_inset space ~
27792 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27793 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27796 \begin_inset space ~
27801 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27802 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27805 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27811 \begin_layout Standard
27812 You can change labels at any time.
27813 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27814 do not need to think about this.
27817 \begin_layout Standard
27818 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27820 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27825 References are described in detail in the section
27826 \begin_inset space ~
27836 \begin_inset space ~
27844 \begin_layout Section
27845 Table of Contents and other Listings
27846 \begin_inset Index idx
27849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27856 \begin_inset Index idx
27859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27860 Navigating ! Outline
27866 \begin_inset Index idx
27869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27885 \begin_layout Subsection
27887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27889 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27896 \begin_layout Standard
27897 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27899 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27900 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27902 \begin_inset space ~
27906 \begin_inset space ~
27912 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27914 If you click on it, the
27918 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27919 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27920 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27922 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27924 \begin_inset space ~
27929 that is described in section
27930 \begin_inset space ~
27934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27936 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27943 \begin_layout Standard
27944 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27945 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27947 \begin_inset space ~
27951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27953 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27957 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27959 \begin_inset space ~
27963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27965 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27969 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27971 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27974 \begin_layout Subsection
27975 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27978 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27985 \begin_layout Standard
27986 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27988 You can insert them via the
27990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27994 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27997 \begin_layout Section
27998 URLs and Hyperlinks
27999 \begin_inset Index idx
28002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28009 \begin_inset Index idx
28012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28021 \begin_layout Subsection
28023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28032 \begin_layout Standard
28033 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28041 \begin_layout Standard
28042 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28044 \begin_inset Flex URL
28047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28057 \begin_layout Standard
28058 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28064 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28068 \begin_layout Standard
28069 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28077 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28086 \begin_layout Subsection
28088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28090 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28097 \begin_layout Standard
28098 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28103 or with the toolbar button
28110 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28119 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28120 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28121 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28123 name "LyX's homepage"
28124 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28129 , an Email address like this:
28130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28132 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28133 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28139 , or a link to a file.
28142 \begin_layout Standard
28143 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28156 to the link target.
28159 \begin_layout Standard
28160 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28161 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28162 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28163 the text style dialog.
28164 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28170 name "LyX's homepage"
28171 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28179 \begin_layout Standard
28180 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28184 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28187 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28191 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28193 \begin_inset Newline newline
28201 \begin_inset Newline newline
28208 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28211 \begin_layout Section
28213 \begin_inset Index idx
28216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28225 name "sec:Appendices"
28232 \begin_layout Standard
28233 Appendices are created with the menu
28235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28237 \begin_inset space ~
28241 \begin_inset space ~
28247 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28248 as the appendix part of the book.
28249 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28252 \begin_layout Standard
28253 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28254 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28255 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28256 and the subsection number.
28257 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28261 \begin_layout Standard
28263 \begin_inset space ~
28267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28269 reference "chap:Credits"
28274 \begin_inset space ~
28278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28280 reference "subsec:Export"
28287 \begin_layout Section
28289 \begin_inset Index idx
28292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28301 name "sec:Bibliography"
28308 \begin_layout Standard
28309 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28311 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28312 \begin_inset space ~
28316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28318 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28325 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28330 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28331 \begin_inset space ~
28335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28337 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28342 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28343 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28344 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28348 using a bibliography database.
28351 \begin_layout Standard
28352 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28353 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28357 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28358 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28359 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28360 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28361 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28364 \begin_layout Subsection
28365 The Bibliography Environment
28366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28368 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28375 \begin_layout Standard
28380 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28382 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28391 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28393 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28394 of ASCII characters only.
28398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28400 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28403 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28409 \begin_inset Newline newline
28413 \begin_inset Flex URL
28416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28418 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28430 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28440 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28443 \begin_layout Standard
28444 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28446 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28449 or the toolbar button
28452 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28456 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28457 containing the available citations.
28458 Select one or more keys from the list and
28468 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28469 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28473 \begin_layout Standard
28474 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28475 entry with surrounding brackets.
28480 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28481 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28493 \begin_layout Standard
28497 Companion Second Edition
28500 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28502 key "latexcompanion"
28510 \begin_layout Standard
28511 The \SpecialChar LyX
28512 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28513 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28523 \begin_layout Standard
28524 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28531 \begin_inset Index idx
28534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28542 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28554 Author A and Author B(Year)
28555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28562 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28564 Then, if you select
28567 \begin_inset space ~
28572 in the document settings
28573 \begin_inset Index idx
28576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28577 Document ! Settings
28584 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28586 \begin_inset space ~
28592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28594 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28601 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28604 \begin_layout Standard
28605 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28608 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28610 \begin_inset space ~
28618 arg "layout-paragraph"
28622 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28625 \begin_layout Subsection
28626 Bibliography databases
28627 \begin_inset Index idx
28630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28631 Bibliography ! Databases
28637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28639 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28646 \begin_layout Standard
28647 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28653 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28655 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28656 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28661 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28663 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28664 your working field in a database.
28665 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28666 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28667 list for that document.
28668 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28672 \begin_layout Standard
28673 The database is a text file with the file extension
28674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28685 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28686 The format is explained in
28687 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28694 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28698 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28704 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28705 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28706 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28708 \begin_inset Flex URL
28711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28713 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28721 \begin_layout Standard
28723 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28724 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28725 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28727 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28729 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28730 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28731 Those are addressed by
28736 \begin_inset Index idx
28739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28741 packages ! biblatex
28747 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28748 (although it has been significantly
28749 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28759 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28760 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28761 might conversely fail to correctly
28762 handle databases that use specific
28771 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28775 \begin_layout Standard
28776 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28781 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28787 \begin_inset Index idx
28790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28791 Document ! Settings
28803 \begin_inset space ~
28808 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28816 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28817 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28819 \begin_inset Index idx
28822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28823 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28832 \begin_layout Standard
28833 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28841 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28843 \begin_inset space ~
28849 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28850 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28858 Add bibliography to TOC
28860 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28865 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28866 in the document or just the cited references.
28869 \begin_layout Standard
28870 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28871 style file is a text file with the file extension
28872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28883 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28884 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28885 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28886 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28888 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28894 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28895 \begin_inset Newline newline
28899 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28901 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28911 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28916 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28920 \begin_layout Standard
28921 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28926 \begin_inset Index idx
28929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28930 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28936 \begin_inset Index idx
28939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28941 packages ! biblatex
28949 \begin_layout Standard
28950 Accessing a database via
28954 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28962 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28964 \begin_inset space ~
28970 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28971 you cannot select a
28976 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28980 \begin_layout Standard
28985 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
28987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28998 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
28999 file (text file with the file extension
29000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29011 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29012 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29014 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29018 \begin_layout Standard
29023 styles are not set in the
29026 \begin_inset space ~
29031 dialog, but in the document settings.
29032 \begin_inset Index idx
29035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29036 Document ! Settings
29041 However, in the dialog in the
29045 field, which is only visible if you use
29049 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29050 example how its heading will appear).
29051 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29066 \begin_layout Standard
29067 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29068 \begin_inset space ~
29072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29074 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29084 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29085 Bibliography Processors
29088 \begin_layout Standard
29089 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29090 uses a bibliography processor,
29091 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29092 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29093 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29095 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29096 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29099 \begin_layout Standard
29100 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29102 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29103 You can do this on a general level in
29105 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29106 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29107 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29110 or for individual documents in
29112 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29113 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29117 The following variants are available by default:
29120 \begin_layout Description
29121 biber a specific, modern processor
29122 \begin_inset Index idx
29125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29132 developed exclusively for
29136 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29142 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29147 makes use of; if you use the
29151 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29158 \begin_layout Description
29159 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29160 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29161 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29165 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29168 \begin_layout Description
29169 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29170 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29174 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29178 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29182 features are supported.
29185 \begin_layout Standard
29186 By default (with the
29192 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29193 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29206 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29207 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29208 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29211 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29212 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29225 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29226 -based bibliography styles).
29227 This should suit most needs.
29230 \begin_layout Standard
29231 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29232 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29233 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29238 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29239 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29240 You can adjust it in
29242 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29243 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29244 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29250 \begin_layout Standard
29251 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29252 can add below the selection.
29253 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29254 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29274 \begin_layout Standard
29276 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29278 These are explained in detail in section
29280 Customizing Bibliographies
29284 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29289 Additional Features
29294 \begin_layout Subsection
29296 \begin_inset Index idx
29299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29300 Bibliography ! Citation format
29306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29308 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29315 \begin_layout Standard
29316 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29321 \begin_inset space \space{}
29324 numerical citation (as
29325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29332 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29340 ) or author-year citations (as
29341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29350 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29354 \begin_layout Standard
29355 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29358 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29359 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29363 \begin_inset Index idx
29366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29367 Document ! Settings
29372 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29378 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29379 labels, is there to use
29382 \begin_inset space ~
29393 \begin_inset space ~
29398 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29401 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29408 \begin_layout Standard
29409 With a bibliography database (see
29410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29412 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29419 ) one has in contrary to the
29423 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29424 These style formats are available:
29427 \begin_layout Description
29429 \begin_inset space ~
29432 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29433 -based approached without any additional packages
29434 (simple numeric citations).
29437 \begin_layout Description
29438 Biblatex loads the package
29443 \begin_inset Index idx
29446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29448 packages ! biblatex
29453 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29455 Biblatex citation style
29459 Biblatex bibliography style
29462 Options to the package
29466 can be entered in the
29473 \begin_layout Description
29475 \begin_inset space ~
29479 \begin_inset space ~
29482 mode) loads the package
29486 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29487 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29499 behavior very closely.
29504 this option has some additional styles.
29509 styles are also supported by this variant.
29512 \begin_layout Description
29514 \begin_inset space ~
29517 (BibTeX) loads the package
29522 \begin_inset Index idx
29525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29532 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29535 \begin_layout Description
29537 \begin_inset space ~
29540 (BibTeX) loads the package
29545 \begin_inset Index idx
29548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29555 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29558 \begin_layout Standard
29567 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29569 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29578 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29580 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29581 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29583 Biblatex citation style
29586 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29592 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29596 \begin_layout Standard
29597 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29598 are available in the
29603 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29604 a name prefix such as
29605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29620 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29625 \begin_inset space \space{}
29629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29640 \begin_layout Standard
29641 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29647 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29662 Here is a simple example where the text
29663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29667 \begin_inset space ~
29671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29674 appears after the reference:
29677 \begin_layout Quote
29679 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29682 key "latexcompanion"
29690 \begin_layout Standard
29691 All styles except for
29695 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29705 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29709 \begin_layout Standard
29710 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29711 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29712 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29717 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29718 multi-citation (so-called
29719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29722 qualified citation lists
29723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29729 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29734 dialog will display three columns in the field
29741 \begin_inset space ~
29749 \begin_inset space ~
29757 \begin_inset space ~
29763 If you double-click on an item's
29766 \begin_inset space ~
29774 \begin_inset space ~
29779 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29782 General text before
29788 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29791 \begin_layout Section
29793 \begin_inset Index idx
29796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29812 \begin_layout Standard
29813 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29817 \begin_inset space ~
29822 or the toolbar button
29829 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29830 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29831 by \SpecialChar LyX
29832 as the index entry.
29835 \begin_layout Standard
29836 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29839 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29841 \begin_inset space ~
29847 A light blue box labeled
29848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29859 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29860 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29864 \begin_layout Standard
29865 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29866 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29867 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29868 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29870 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29872 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29880 \begin_layout Subsection
29881 Grouping Index Entries
29882 \begin_inset Index idx
29885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29894 \begin_layout Standard
29895 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29897 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29898 lists under the entry
29899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29907 First we create the entry
29908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29916 \begin_inset space ~
29920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29922 reference "subsec:Lists"
29927 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29928 \begin_inset space ~
29932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29934 reference "sec:Itemize"
29938 , we insert the command
29941 \begin_layout Standard
29947 \begin_layout Standard
29951 \begin_layout Standard
29957 \begin_layout Standard
29958 for the enumerated list in section
29959 \begin_inset space ~
29963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29965 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29972 \begin_layout Standard
29973 The exclamation mark
29974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29981 marks the grouping levels.
29982 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
29983 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
29984 If we don't have an index entry for
29985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29992 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
29995 \begin_layout Subsection
29997 \begin_inset Index idx
30000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30001 Index ! Page ranges
30009 \begin_layout Standard
30010 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30012 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30013 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30014 an index entry in section
30015 \begin_inset space ~
30019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30021 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30028 \begin_layout Standard
30031 Paragraph environments|(
30034 \begin_layout Standard
30035 and another entry at the end of section
30036 \begin_inset space ~
30040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30042 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30049 \begin_layout Standard
30052 Paragraph environments|)
30055 \begin_layout Standard
30057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30080 respectively start and end the index range.
30081 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30082 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30083 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30084 An example is the index entry
30085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30088 Document ! Settings
30089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30095 \begin_layout Subsection
30097 \begin_inset Index idx
30100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30101 Index ! Cross referencing
30109 \begin_layout Standard
30110 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30111 We referred for example in the index entry
30112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30120 \begin_inset space ~
30124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30126 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30130 ) to the index entry
30131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30138 in the same section using the entry
30141 \begin_layout Standard
30144 GIF|see{Image formats}
30147 \begin_layout Standard
30148 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30150 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30151 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30154 \begin_layout Subsection
30156 \begin_inset Index idx
30159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30160 Index ! Entry order
30168 \begin_layout Standard
30169 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30170 follow the rules for the index order.
30171 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30177 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30179 \begin_inset space ~
30183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30185 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30194 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30195 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30220 \begin_inset Index idx
30223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30224 Dummy entries ! maïs
30230 \begin_inset Index idx
30233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30234 Dummy entries ! maître
30240 \begin_inset Index idx
30243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30244 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30249 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30250 maïs, maison, maître.
30251 To achieve this, we use the command
30254 \begin_layout Standard
30257 previous entry@current entry
30260 \begin_layout Standard
30261 In our case we want to have
30262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30277 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30280 \begin_layout Standard
30286 \begin_layout Standard
30287 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30288 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30290 See the next subsection for an example.
30293 \begin_layout Standard
30294 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30300 \begin_layout Standard
30301 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30306 to generate the index (see section
30307 \begin_inset space ~
30311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30313 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30322 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30323 -package aeguill in section
30324 \begin_inset space ~
30328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30330 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30334 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30335 -packages although all these index
30336 commands start with
30337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30350 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30355 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30358 \begin_layout Standard
30370 \begin_layout Standard
30382 \begin_layout Subsection
30384 \begin_inset Index idx
30387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30388 Index ! Entry layout
30396 \begin_layout Standard
30397 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30398 \begin_inset Index idx
30401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30404 This is an italic dummy entry
30409 You can also format the page number using the character
30410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30417 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30418 -command without a backslash.
30419 We can write for example
30422 \begin_layout Standard
30425 italic page number:|textit
30428 \begin_layout Standard
30429 to get the page number in italic.
30430 \begin_inset Index idx
30433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30434 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30439 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30440 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30458 \begin_inset space ~
30464 Have a look at section
30465 \begin_inset space ~
30469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30471 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30475 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30479 \begin_layout Standard
30480 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30488 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30492 to generate the index, see section
30493 \begin_inset space ~
30497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30499 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30508 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30513 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30514 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30517 key "latexcompanion"
30530 \begin_layout Standard
30531 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30533 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30534 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30535 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30536 If so, put the following in the preamble
30539 \begin_layout Standard
30551 \begin_layout Standard
30555 \begin_layout Standard
30561 \begin_layout Standard
30562 in the index entry.
30563 \begin_inset Index idx
30566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30567 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30572 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30573 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30574 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30577 \begin_layout Standard
30578 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30579 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30580 a bold font for all index entries.
30581 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30593 documentation for details,
30594 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30596 key "makeindex,xindy"
30604 \begin_layout Subsection
30606 \begin_inset Index idx
30609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30618 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30625 \begin_layout Standard
30626 If the index generation program
30630 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30631 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30635 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30636 distribution, is used.
30640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30645 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30646 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30647 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30648 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30649 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30659 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30661 dialog, see section
30662 \begin_inset space ~
30666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30668 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30673 The available options are listed and explained in
30674 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30676 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30682 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30686 \begin_layout Standard
30687 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30688 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30692 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30696 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30697 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30700 \begin_layout Subsection
30704 \begin_layout Standard
30705 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30706 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30714 next to the standard index.
30716 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30717 that add this feature.
30724 \begin_inset Index idx
30727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30729 packages ! splitidx
30734 package to generate multiple indexes.
30735 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30741 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30743 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30751 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30752 style, but it also includes
30753 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30754 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30762 \begin_layout Standard
30763 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30764 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30766 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30767 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30770 and select the option
30772 Use multiple Indexes
30779 already contains the standard index
30780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30788 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30789 also appear as a heading) to the
30793 input field and press the
30798 The new index now also appears in the list.
30799 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30800 label color to the new index.
30803 \begin_layout Standard
30804 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30814 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30815 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30816 are additional features:
30819 \begin_layout Itemize
30820 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30821 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30824 \begin_layout Itemize
30825 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30826 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30834 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30835 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30836 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30837 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30840 \begin_layout Section
30841 Nomenclature/Glossary
30842 \begin_inset Index idx
30845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30852 \begin_inset Index idx
30855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30886 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30893 \begin_layout Standard
30894 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30895 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30896 called nomenclature or glossary.
30899 \begin_layout Standard
30900 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30907 \begin_inset Index idx
30910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30918 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30920 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30927 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30931 \begin_layout Standard
30932 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30933 and then use the menu
30935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30941 \begin_inset space ~
30946 or the toolbar button
30949 arg "nomencl-insert"
30954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30965 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30968 \begin_layout Standard
30969 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30970 The first is the term or
30974 that you wish to define.
30979 of the term or symbol.
30982 \begin_layout Standard
30983 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30991 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
30992 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31000 \begin_layout Subsection
31001 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31002 \begin_inset Index idx
31005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31006 Nomenclature ! Layout
31014 \begin_layout Standard
31015 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31019 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31026 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31034 \begin_inset Newline newline
31042 \begin_inset Newline newline
31048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31055 character starts/ends the formula.
31056 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31057 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31069 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31079 \begin_layout Standard
31080 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31081 -syntax is given in section
31082 \begin_inset space ~
31086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31088 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31095 \begin_layout Standard
31099 \begin_inset space ~
31104 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31106 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31111 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31118 in this document is:
31119 \begin_inset Newline newline
31124 dummy entry for the character
31129 \begin_inset Newline newline
31141 \begin_inset space ~
31151 font use the command
31180 \begin_layout Standard
31181 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31186 \begin_inset space \space{}
31190 \begin_inset Newline newline
31206 \begin_inset Newline newline
31209 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31210 This command will make the font of all symbols
31217 \begin_inset space ~
31225 \begin_layout Standard
31226 If the characters |
31227 \begin_inset space \space{}
31231 \begin_inset space \space{}
31235 \begin_inset space \space{}
31239 \begin_inset space \space{}
31243 \begin_inset space \space{}
31246 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31247 a quote character in front of them.
31248 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31249 LatexCommand nomenclature
31250 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31251 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31259 \begin_layout Subsection
31260 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31261 \begin_inset Index idx
31264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31265 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31273 \begin_layout Standard
31274 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31275 -code of the symbol
31277 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31279 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31282 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31283 LatexCommand nomenclature
31285 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31293 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31297 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31298 LatexCommand nomenclature
31301 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31307 They will be sorted by
31308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31334 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31337 will be sorted before the
31341 since the character
31342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31349 is considered in sorting.
31352 \begin_layout Standard
31353 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31356 \begin_inset space ~
31361 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31362 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31364 For the example given, you can insert
31368 in this field for the
31369 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31376 will be located before
31377 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31383 \begin_layout Standard
31384 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31389 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31399 \begin_layout Subsection
31400 Nomenclature Options
31401 \begin_inset Index idx
31404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31405 Nomenclature ! Options
31413 \begin_layout Standard
31418 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31419 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31422 \begin_layout Description
31423 refeq Appends the phrase
31424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31439 to every nomenclature entry, where
31445 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31448 \begin_layout Description
31449 refpage Appends the phrase
31450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31465 to every nomenclature entry, where
31471 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31474 \begin_layout Description
31475 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31478 \begin_layout Standard
31479 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31480 class options list in the
31482 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31486 In this document the options
31493 \begin_layout Standard
31494 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31500 \begin_layout Standard
31501 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31502 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31507 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31510 \begin_layout Description
31520 \begin_layout Description
31523 nomrefpage Like the
31530 \begin_layout Description
31533 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31542 \begin_layout Description
31546 \begin_inset space ~
31552 \begin_inset space ~
31557 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31560 \begin_layout Standard
31562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31569 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31570 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31574 \begin_layout Standard
31582 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31585 \begin_inset Newline newline
31592 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31597 \begin_inset Newline newline
31601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31616 by their translation.
31619 \begin_layout Subsection
31620 Printing the Nomenclature
31621 \begin_inset Index idx
31624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31625 Nomenclature ! Printing
31633 \begin_layout Standard
31634 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31637 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31653 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31654 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31655 You can choose between these settings:
31658 \begin_layout Description
31659 Default a space of 1
31660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31666 \begin_layout Description
31668 \begin_inset space ~
31672 \begin_inset space ~
31675 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31678 \begin_layout Description
31679 Custom custom space
31682 \begin_layout Standard
31683 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31692 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31700 For example, in order to change the name to
31704 , add the following line to the preamble:
31707 \begin_layout Standard
31715 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31718 \begin_layout Subsection
31719 Nomenclature Program
31720 \begin_inset Index idx
31723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31724 Nomenclature ! Program
31730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31732 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31739 \begin_layout Standard
31745 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31746 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31748 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31753 by adding options, see section
31754 \begin_inset space ~
31758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31760 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31765 The available options are listed and explained in
31766 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31768 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31776 \begin_layout Section
31778 \begin_inset Index idx
31781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31788 \begin_inset Index idx
31791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31792 Document ! Branches
31798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31800 name "sec:Branches"
31807 \begin_layout Standard
31808 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31809 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31810 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31811 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31814 \begin_layout Standard
31815 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31816 allows you to put text into branches.
31817 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31818 To create a branch, either select the menu
31820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31821 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31824 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31826 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31833 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31834 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31835 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31836 and whether the name of the branch should
31837 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31838 (see below for an example).
31839 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31840 to the name of the other) and to add
31841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31853 \begin_inset space ~
31856 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31857 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31860 \begin_layout Standard
31861 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31862 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31867 where you can choose a branch.
31868 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31872 \begin_layout Standard
31873 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31874 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31877 \begin_layout Standard
31878 \begin_inset Branch Question
31882 \begin_layout Standard
31887 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31895 \begin_layout Standard
31896 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31900 \begin_layout Standard
31905 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31913 \begin_layout Standard
31920 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31921 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31924 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31925 Consider for example a file
31926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31933 which has the above branches.
31935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31942 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31966 branch were inactive,
31967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31982 branch was active, likewise
31983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31998 branch was active, and
31999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32002 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32006 if both branches were active.
32007 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32008 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32014 \begin_layout Standard
32015 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32021 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32022 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32026 \begin_inset space ~
32034 \begin_layout Standard
32035 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32039 \begin_layout Standard
32045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32052 branch is deactivated.
32058 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32064 \begin_layout Standard
32065 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32066 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32067 definitions for each branch.
32068 For example you can define for the question branch
32072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32073 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32074 -syntax, see section
32075 \begin_inset space ~
32079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32081 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32093 \begin_layout Standard
32103 \begin_layout Standard
32113 \begin_layout Standard
32114 and for the answer branch
32117 \begin_layout Standard
32127 \begin_layout Standard
32137 \begin_layout Standard
32138 \begin_inset Branch Question
32142 \begin_layout Standard
32146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32174 \begin_layout Standard
32175 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32179 \begin_layout Standard
32183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32211 \begin_layout Standard
32212 Now it is possible to use the
32216 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32223 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32226 commands to obtain conditional output.
32227 Here is an example formula where only the
32234 \begin_inset Formula
32236 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32244 \begin_layout Standard
32245 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32253 \begin_layout Standard
32254 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32260 \begin_inset space \space{}
32263 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32265 For this advanced usage, see the
32271 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32276 \begin_layout Section
32278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32280 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32285 \begin_inset Index idx
32288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32297 \begin_layout Standard
32300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32301 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32304 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32306 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32312 \begin_inset Index idx
32315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32317 packages ! hyperref
32322 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32323 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32324 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32325 part of the document.
32329 \begin_layout Standard
32330 The header information in the dialog tab
32334 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32335 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32336 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32337 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32341 \begin_inset space ~
32345 \begin_inset space ~
32350 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32351 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32352 and author entries.
32356 \begin_inset space ~
32360 \begin_inset space ~
32364 \begin_inset space ~
32369 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32372 \begin_layout Standard
32373 You can specify in the dialog tab
32377 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32382 \begin_inset space ~
32386 \begin_inset space ~
32390 \begin_inset space ~
32395 option allows long links to be split;
32398 \begin_inset space ~
32402 \begin_inset space ~
32406 \begin_inset space ~
32414 \begin_inset space ~
32419 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32422 \begin_inset space ~
32427 colors the different links.
32428 The default colors are:
32431 \begin_layout Labeling
32432 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32437 for hyperlinks and URLs
32440 \begin_layout Labeling
32441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32449 \begin_layout Labeling
32450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32458 \begin_layout Standard
32459 but you can change these in the field
32464 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32467 \begin_layout Standard
32470 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32473 \begin_layout Standard
32478 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32479 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32480 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32483 \begin_layout Standard
32488 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32489 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32490 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32500 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32501 when opening the PDF.
32503 \begin_inset space ~
32506 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32507 \begin_inset space ~
32510 1 will only display the sections.
32513 \begin_layout Standard
32514 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32515 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32521 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32532 \begin_layout Section
32534 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32538 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32545 \begin_layout Subsection
32548 \begin_inset Index idx
32551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32561 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32568 \begin_layout Standard
32569 As \SpecialChar LyX
32570 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32571 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32572 commands and constructs,
32575 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32576 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32577 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32578 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32579 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32580 cannot support all packages and
32584 \begin_layout Standard
32585 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32586 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32587 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32591 Code box is created by the menu
32593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32595 \begin_inset space ~
32600 or by the toolbar button
32613 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32621 \begin_layout Standard
32622 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32624 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32626 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32631 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32636 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32643 , you can write the command part
32649 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32650 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32654 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32655 Code box behind the word.
32656 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32657 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32661 \begin_layout Standard
32662 \begin_inset Graphics
32663 filename clipart/ERT.png
32671 \begin_layout Standard
32675 \begin_layout Standard
32676 This is a line with a
32680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32703 \begin_layout Standard
32704 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32712 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32713 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32714 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32715 know that the command is finished.
32723 \begin_layout Subsection
32724 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32726 \begin_inset Argument 1
32729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32730 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32737 \begin_inset Index idx
32740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32750 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32757 \begin_layout Standard
32758 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32759 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32760 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32761 uses in the background.
32762 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32763 is based on commands, you can
32764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32772 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32773 any time if you know the right commands.
32774 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32775 is the end of the day.
32776 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32777 all caption labels bold.
32778 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32780 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32784 \begin_layout Standard
32785 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32787 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32789 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32792 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32802 \begin_layout Standard
32803 As result you find that the package
32808 \begin_inset Index idx
32811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32819 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32824 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32828 \begin_inset space ~
32836 \begin_layout Standard
32841 usepackage[options]{package name}
32844 \begin_layout Standard
32845 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32846 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32847 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32848 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32851 \begin_layout Standard
32852 In your case the package name is
32857 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32862 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32863 So you add the command
32866 \begin_layout Standard
32871 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32874 \begin_layout Standard
32875 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32880 For more commands provided by the
32884 package, have a look at its documentation,
32885 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32900 \begin_layout Standard
32901 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32903 For example if you use a
32907 class, you don't need the package
32911 , you can instead write
32914 \begin_layout Standard
32919 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32924 \begin_layout Standard
32925 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32926 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32927 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32934 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32937 \begin_layout Standard
32938 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32939 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32941 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32942 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32943 Code box as described in the previous
32947 \begin_layout Standard
32948 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32949 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32952 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32954 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
32962 \begin_layout Standard
32963 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32969 \begin_layout Standard
32973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32983 \begin_inset Note Note
32986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32987 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
32995 \begin_layout Left Header
32996 \begin_inset Argument 1
32999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33019 \begin_inset Note Note
33022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33023 defines the header line as described below
33031 \begin_layout Center Header
33032 \begin_inset Argument 1
33035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33044 \begin_layout Right Header
33045 \begin_inset Argument 1
33048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33069 \begin_layout Left Footer
33070 \begin_inset Argument 1
33073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33094 \begin_layout Center Footer
33095 \begin_inset Argument 1
33098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33110 \begin_inset Newline newline
33114 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33120 \begin_layout Right Footer
33121 \begin_inset Argument 1
33124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33146 \begin_layout Section
33147 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33148 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33150 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33155 \begin_inset Index idx
33158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33159 Document ! Header/Footer line
33165 \begin_inset Index idx
33168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33177 \begin_layout Standard
33178 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33182 \begin_inset space ~
33193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33199 \begin_inset space ~
33205 As a second step add in the menu
33207 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33208 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33217 Custom Header/Footerlines
33220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33224 This module offers the following 6
33225 \begin_inset space ~
33231 \begin_layout Description
33233 \begin_inset space ~
33237 \begin_inset space ~
33241 \begin_inset space ~
33245 \begin_inset space ~
33249 \begin_inset space ~
33255 \begin_layout Description
33257 \begin_inset space ~
33261 \begin_inset space ~
33265 \begin_inset space ~
33269 \begin_inset space ~
33273 \begin_inset space ~
33279 \begin_layout Standard
33280 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33281 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33284 \begin_layout Standard
33285 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33286 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33288 \begin_inset space ~
33292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33294 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33298 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33301 \begin_layout Standard
33302 \begin_inset Float figure
33308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33311 \begin_inset Tabular
33312 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33313 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33314 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33315 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33316 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33318 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33336 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33347 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33365 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33376 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33380 The normal text on the page goes here.
33381 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33383 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33384 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33389 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33398 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33409 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33427 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33438 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33456 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33474 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33479 name "fig:Page-layout"
33483 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33496 \begin_layout Standard
33497 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33505 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33509 \begin_inset space ~
33514 is set to “Default”.
33515 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33524 \begin_layout Subsection
33528 \begin_layout Standard
33529 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33530 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33531 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33532 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33534 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33536 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33539 \begin_layout Standard
33540 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33541 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33547 \begin_inset space ~
33555 \begin_layout Description
33558 thepage prints the current page number
33561 \begin_layout Description
33564 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33567 \begin_layout Description
33570 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33573 \begin_layout Description
33576 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33577 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33584 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33587 because it usually goes in a left header.
33590 \begin_layout Description
33593 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33594 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33596 It is normally used in the right header.
33599 \begin_layout Subsection
33600 Default header/footer
33603 \begin_layout Standard
33604 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33605 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33606 footer has the page number.
33607 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33608 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33609 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33612 \begin_inset space ~
33620 \begin_layout Subsection
33624 \begin_layout Standard
33625 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33626 Some pages are different.
33627 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33628 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33629 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33630 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33631 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33635 Header and footer decoration line
33638 \begin_layout Standard
33639 By default, you get a 0.4
33640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33643 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33644 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33656 in the following way:
33659 \begin_layout Standard
33666 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33669 \begin_layout Standard
33670 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33683 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33690 \begin_layout Standard
33691 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33693 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33694 \begin_inset space ~
33698 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33709 Several header/footer lines
33712 \begin_layout Standard
33713 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33714 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33715 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33717 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33733 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33735 \begin_inset space ~
33743 \begin_layout Standard
33750 headheight}{height}
33753 \begin_layout Standard
33758 is a size in standard units (e.
33759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33763 \begin_inset space \space{}
33771 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33772 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33773 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33774 logfile with the menu
33776 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33778 \begin_inset space ~
33786 \begin_inset space ~
33791 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33796 \begin_inset Index idx
33799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33801 packages ! fancyhdr
33807 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33808 for your header/footer.
33811 \begin_layout Subsection
33815 \begin_layout Standard
33816 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33817 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33818 This example consists of the following definition:
33821 \begin_layout Description
33823 \begin_inset space ~
33832 , empty optional argument
33835 \begin_layout Description
33837 \begin_inset space ~
33840 Header empty, empty optional argument
33843 \begin_layout Description
33845 \begin_inset space ~
33854 in the optional argument
33857 \begin_layout Description
33859 \begin_inset space ~
33868 in the optional argument
33871 \begin_layout Description
33873 \begin_inset space ~
33886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33890 \begin_inset Newline newline
33894 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33901 in the optional argument
33904 \begin_layout Description
33906 \begin_inset space ~
33915 , empty optional argument
33918 \begin_layout Description
33921 headrulewidth set to 2
33922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33928 \begin_layout Standard
33929 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33930 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33936 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33946 \begin_layout Standard
33947 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33953 \begin_layout Standard
33957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33961 pagestyle{headings}
33967 \begin_inset Note Note
33970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33971 switches back to page style with the default headings
33979 \begin_layout Section
33980 Previewing Snippets of your Document
33981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33983 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
33988 \begin_inset Index idx
33991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33998 \begin_inset Index idx
34001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34010 \begin_layout Standard
34012 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34013 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34014 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34017 \begin_layout Subsection
34021 \begin_layout Standard
34022 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34028 \begin_inset Index idx
34031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34033 packages ! preview-latex
34038 (on some systems named simply
34043 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34045 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34052 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34054 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34062 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34063 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34064 -package are automatically
34065 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34069 \begin_layout Subsection
34073 \begin_layout Standard
34074 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34075 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34077 activate the option
34080 \begin_inset space ~
34087 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34093 \begin_inset space ~
34097 \begin_inset space ~
34100 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34107 \begin_inset space ~
34120 \begin_inset space ~
34125 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34128 \begin_layout Standard
34129 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34134 \begin_inset space ~
34142 \begin_inset space ~
34150 \begin_layout Standard
34151 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34152 and when you finish
34156 \begin_layout Standard
34157 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34165 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34166 generated by activating the option
34169 \begin_inset space ~
34175 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34183 \begin_layout Subsection
34184 Selected document parts
34187 \begin_layout Standard
34188 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34189 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34190 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34191 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34193 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34199 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34200 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34201 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34204 \begin_layout Standard
34205 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34212 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34224 is explained in section
34226 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34231 \begin_inset space ~
34241 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34242 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34243 the final rotated boxes,
34244 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34245 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34247 Here is the result:
34250 \begin_layout Standard
34251 \begin_inset Preview
34253 \begin_layout Standard
34258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34262 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34268 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34278 height_special "totalheight"
34283 backgroundcolor "none"
34286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34311 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34317 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34339 \begin_layout Standard
34340 Previewing works also for colors.
34341 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34360 is explained in section
34367 \begin_inset space ~
34380 \begin_layout Standard
34381 \begin_inset Preview
34383 \begin_layout Standard
34387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34406 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34411 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34430 \begin_layout Standard
34431 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34437 \begin_layout Standard
34438 If \SpecialChar LyX
34439 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34440 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34441 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34442 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34443 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34444 the \SpecialChar TeX
34446 If \SpecialChar LyX
34447 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34448 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34450 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34451 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34452 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34455 \begin_layout Subsection
34460 \begin_layout Standard
34461 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34462 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34465 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34467 \begin_inset space ~
34472 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34474 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34476 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34477 's main window, then only this selection
34478 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34479 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34480 the source view window.
34485 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34486 ; but note that if you have
34487 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34489 not just the one which is open at the time.
34492 \begin_layout Section
34493 Advanced Find and Replace
34494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34496 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34501 \begin_inset Index idx
34504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34511 \begin_inset Index idx
34514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34523 \begin_layout Subsection
34527 \begin_layout Standard
34528 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34529 allows for searching of complex,
34530 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34532 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34533 The key-features are:
34536 \begin_layout Itemize
34537 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34538 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34539 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34543 \begin_layout Itemize
34544 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34545 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34546 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34547 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34550 \begin_layout Itemize
34551 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34552 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34553 outside of mathematics environments
34556 \begin_layout Itemize
34557 Search may be widened to a specific
34562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34566 \begin_inset space ~
34569 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34570 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34577 \begin_layout Itemize
34578 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34579 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34584 \begin_inset space ~
34587 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34590 \begin_layout Subsection
34594 \begin_layout Standard
34595 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34597 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34610 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34613 ) or the toolbar button
34616 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34622 Advanced Find and Replace
34627 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34631 \begin_layout Standard
34637 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34641 \begin_inset space ~
34646 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34649 arg "paragraph-break"
34653 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34654 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34658 arg "paragraph-break"
34661 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34665 searches backwards.
34668 \begin_layout Standard
34672 \begin_inset space ~
34677 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34686 \begin_inset space ~
34691 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34694 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34695 Searching for mathematics
34698 \begin_layout Standard
34699 Mathematical formulas, such as
34700 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34703 or something more complex like
34704 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34707 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34712 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34713 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34714 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34715 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34725 \begin_layout Standard
34726 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34727 This is done by switching to the
34731 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34736 This way, entering in the
34743 \begin_layout Itemize
34744 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34745 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34748 \begin_layout Itemize
34749 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34750 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34753 \begin_layout Itemize
34754 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34755 of it only within section headings.
34756 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34757 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34761 \begin_layout Itemize
34762 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34763 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34770 \begin_layout Standard
34771 The entries made in the
34775 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34778 \begin_inset space ~
34784 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34788 button or alternatively press
34791 arg "paragraph-break"
34798 while the cursor is in the
34801 \begin_inset space ~
34809 \begin_layout Standard
34810 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34812 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34816 \begin_layout Itemize
34817 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34818 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34826 with its typewriter version
34827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34841 \begin_layout Itemize
34842 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34848 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34860 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34867 (you may want to enable the
34870 \begin_inset space ~
34878 \begin_inset space ~
34883 options and disable the
34891 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34899 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34900 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34904 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34907 , or occurrences of
34908 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34912 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34918 \begin_layout Subsection
34922 \begin_layout Standard
34923 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34928 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34930 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34932 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34942 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34948 This is done with the context menu
34950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34951 Insert Regular Expression
34953 while the cursor is in the
34958 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34959 expression matching rules
34963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34964 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
34967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34971 \begin_inset space ~
34974 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
34975 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
34981 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
34982 same text in the document.
34983 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
34984 Examples of using such a feature may be:
34987 \begin_layout Enumerate
34988 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
34993 editor the fraction
34994 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
34998 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35001 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35002 fractions with the given denominator.
35005 \begin_layout Enumerate
35006 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35018 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35023 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35024 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35025 Also, by inserting a
35026 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35029 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35030 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35033 \begin_layout Standard
35034 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35035 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35036 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35039 , and referring back to them through
35040 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35044 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35048 For example, try searching with the regexp
35049 \begin_inset Newline newline
35052 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35055 \begin_inset Newline newline
35058 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35061 \begin_layout Standard
35062 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35065 \begin_layout Standard
35066 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35074 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35075 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35076 sub-expressions is absolute.
35078 \begin_inset space ~
35082 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35085 always refers to the first occurrence of
35086 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35089 in all entered regexps.
35097 \begin_layout Section
35099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35101 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35106 \begin_inset Index idx
35109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35118 \begin_layout Standard
35120 has a built-in spell checker.
35123 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35130 key or the toolbar button
35133 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35136 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35137 beginning of the currently selected text.
35138 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35139 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35140 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35141 scrolled so that it is visible.
35142 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35143 n, if any could be found.
35144 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35148 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35149 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35152 \begin_layout Standard
35153 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35160 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35161 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35163 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35164 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35167 \begin_inset space ~
35175 arg "dialog-show character"
35178 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35180 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35183 \begin_layout Standard
35184 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35185 can be downloaded from here:
35186 \begin_inset Newline newline
35190 \begin_inset Flex URL
35193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35195 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35201 \begin_inset Newline newline
35205 \begin_inset space ~
35208 files for each language.
35209 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35210 \begin_inset space ~
35213 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35214 's installation subfolder
35222 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35224 \begin_inset Newline newline
35227 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35228 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35229 but in most cases these are
35245 is the language code.
35248 \begin_layout Subsection
35252 \begin_layout Standard
35255 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35256 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35258 \begin_inset space ~
35261 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35264 you can set the following things:
35267 \begin_layout Description
35269 \begin_inset space ~
35272 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35273 should use for spell checking.
35274 Depending on your platform,
35288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35289 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35290 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35305 \begin_inset space ~
35308 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35311 \begin_layout Description
35313 \begin_inset space ~
35316 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35317 will always use the given language
35318 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35321 \begin_layout Description
35323 \begin_inset space ~
35326 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35332 \begin_inset space \space{}
35336 This should normally not be needed.
35339 \begin_layout Description
35341 \begin_inset space ~
35345 \begin_inset space ~
35348 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35360 \begin_layout Description
35362 \begin_inset space ~
35365 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35366 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35367 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35368 appear in a context menu.
35369 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35373 \begin_layout Description
35375 \begin_inset space ~
35379 \begin_inset space ~
35383 \begin_inset space ~
35386 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35390 \begin_layout Section
35392 \begin_inset Index idx
35395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35404 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35411 \begin_layout Standard
35413 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35414 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35426 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35436 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35438 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35439 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35440 which are available for many languages.
35443 \begin_layout Standard
35444 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35445 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35449 \begin_layout Subsection
35450 Setting up the thesaurus
35453 \begin_layout Standard
35462 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35466 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35471 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35477 \begin_inset space ~
35485 For instance, the US English files are named:
35488 \begin_layout Itemize
35492 \begin_layout Itemize
35496 \begin_layout Standard
35505 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35506 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35509 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35510 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35511 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35513 \begin_inset space ~
35518 ) to the path where they are installed.
35522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35523 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35524 ies, typical locations are
35530 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35534 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35538 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35541 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35547 LibreOffice-<Version>
35554 On the Mac, the default location is
35556 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35557 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35558 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35559 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35560 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35561 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35569 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35570 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35571 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35575 \begin_layout Standard
35576 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35577 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35581 \begin_layout Itemize
35582 \begin_inset Flex URL
35585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35587 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35595 \begin_layout Standard
35596 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35597 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35599 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35600 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35601 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35603 \begin_inset space ~
35608 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35610 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35611 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35615 \begin_layout Standard
35616 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35618 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35621 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35627 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35630 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35631 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35639 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35640 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35641 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35643 \begin_inset space ~
35648 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35651 \begin_layout Subsection
35652 Using the thesaurus
35655 \begin_layout Standard
35656 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35658 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35661 or the toolbar button
35664 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35667 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35669 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35671 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35672 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35673 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35682 ), related terms (such as
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35694 ), compounds (such as
35697 \begin_inset space ~
35706 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35715 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35718 \begin_layout Standard
35719 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35720 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35724 \begin_layout Standard
35725 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35726 the dictionary, such as the above
35730 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35735 \begin_inset space \space{}
35738 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35739 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35740 For example, looking up the word form
35744 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35749 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35754 \begin_inset space \space{}
35765 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35766 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35767 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35770 \begin_layout Section
35772 \begin_inset Index idx
35775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35782 \begin_inset Index idx
35785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35786 Document ! Change Tracking
35792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35794 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35801 \begin_layout Standard
35802 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35803 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35804 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35805 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35809 \begin_inset space ~
35812 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35814 \begin_inset space ~
35822 \begin_layout Standard
35823 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35837 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35838 You can change the color in
35840 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35841 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35843 \begin_inset space ~
35847 \begin_inset space ~
35852 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35858 \begin_inset Index idx
35861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35862 Color ! Change tracking
35867 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35868 's status bar when the
35869 cursor is in changed text.
35870 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35873 arg "changes-merge"
35879 \begin_layout Standard
35880 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35882 \begin_inset Index idx
35885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35894 \begin_layout Standard
35895 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35901 \begin_layout Standard
35902 \begin_inset Graphics
35903 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35911 \begin_layout Standard
35912 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35918 \begin_layout Standard
35919 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35922 \begin_layout Standard
35923 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35929 \begin_layout Standard
35930 \begin_inset Tabular
35931 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35932 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35933 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35934 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35944 arg "changes-track"
35952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35960 \begin_inset space ~
35963 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35965 \begin_inset space ~
35974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35983 arg "changes-output"
35991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35999 \begin_inset space ~
36002 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36004 \begin_inset space ~
36008 \begin_inset space ~
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36042 Jumps to the next change
36048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36057 arg "change-accept"
36065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36071 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36076 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36078 \begin_inset space ~
36087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36096 arg "change-reject"
36104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36112 \begin_inset space ~
36115 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36117 \begin_inset space ~
36126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36135 arg "changes-merge"
36143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36149 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36151 \begin_inset space ~
36154 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36156 \begin_inset space ~
36165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36174 arg "all-changes-accept"
36182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36188 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36190 \begin_inset space ~
36193 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36195 \begin_inset space ~
36199 \begin_inset space ~
36208 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36217 arg "all-changes-reject"
36225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36231 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36233 \begin_inset space ~
36236 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36242 \begin_inset space ~
36251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36275 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36277 \begin_inset space ~
36286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36309 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36311 \begin_inset space ~
36327 \begin_layout Standard
36328 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36334 \begin_layout Standard
36335 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36355 \begin_layout Standard
36356 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36357 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36358 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36359 the next change after the current cursor position.
36360 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36361 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36362 step to the next change.
36363 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36366 \begin_layout Standard
36367 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36368 to describe a change.
36371 \begin_layout Standard
36372 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36378 \begin_inset Index idx
36381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36389 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36391 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36398 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36402 \begin_layout Section
36403 Comparison of Documents
36404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36406 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36411 \begin_inset Index idx
36414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36415 Comparison of documents
36423 \begin_layout Standard
36424 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36427 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36431 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36432 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36434 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36436 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36440 \begin_inset space ~
36444 \begin_inset space ~
36448 \begin_inset space ~
36457 \begin_inset space ~
36461 \begin_inset space ~
36465 \begin_inset space ~
36469 \begin_inset space ~
36473 \begin_inset space ~
36477 \begin_inset space ~
36482 enables the change tracking option
36485 \begin_inset space ~
36489 \begin_inset space ~
36493 \begin_inset space ~
36498 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36501 \begin_layout Section
36502 International Support
36503 \begin_inset Index idx
36506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36507 International support
36515 \begin_layout Standard
36516 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36517 with any language you want.
36518 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36519 up \SpecialChar LyX
36521 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36523 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36531 \begin_layout Standard
36532 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36533 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36534 \begin_inset space ~
36538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36540 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36547 \begin_layout Subsection
36549 \begin_inset Index idx
36552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36559 \begin_inset Index idx
36562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36563 Document ! Settings
36569 \begin_inset Index idx
36572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36573 Document ! Language
36581 \begin_layout Standard
36584 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36585 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36588 dialog lets you set
36590 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36595 \begin_layout Standard
36600 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36605 \begin_inset space ~
36610 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36611 For details about the different encoding options see section
36612 \begin_inset space ~
36616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36618 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36625 \begin_layout Subsection
36626 Keyboard mapping configuration
36627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36629 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36636 \begin_layout Standard
36637 If you have for example a U.
36638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36641 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36642 can use an alternate keymap.
36643 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36648 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36649 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36650 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36653 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36654 \begin_inset space ~
36658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36660 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36665 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36666 which one you want to use.
36669 \begin_layout Standard
36670 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36671 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36672 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36676 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36677 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36678 one to support the characters you want.
36679 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36686 \begin_layout Chapter
36689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36691 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36698 \begin_layout Standard
36699 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36700 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36701 topic inside the user's guide.
36704 \begin_layout Section
36706 \begin_inset Index idx
36709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36718 \begin_layout Standard
36723 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36726 \begin_layout Subsection
36730 \begin_layout Standard
36731 Creates a new document.
36734 \begin_layout Subsection
36738 \begin_layout Standard
36739 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36740 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36741 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36744 \begin_layout Subsection
36748 \begin_layout Standard
36752 \begin_layout Subsection
36756 \begin_layout Standard
36757 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36758 Click there on a file to open it.
36761 \begin_layout Subsection
36765 \begin_layout Standard
36766 Closes the current document.
36769 \begin_layout Subsection
36773 \begin_layout Standard
36774 Closes all opened documents.
36777 \begin_layout Subsection
36781 \begin_layout Standard
36782 Saves the actual document.
36785 \begin_layout Subsection
36789 \begin_layout Standard
36790 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36793 \begin_layout Subsection
36797 \begin_layout Standard
36798 Saves all opened documents.
36801 \begin_layout Subsection
36805 \begin_layout Standard
36806 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36809 \begin_layout Subsection
36813 \begin_layout Standard
36814 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36815 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36816 It is described in the section
36818 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36823 Additional Features
36828 \begin_layout Subsection
36832 \begin_layout Standard
36833 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36834 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36836 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36837 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36841 \begin_layout Standard
36842 When using the menu entry
36845 \begin_inset space ~
36850 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36854 \begin_inset space ~
36858 \begin_inset space ~
36862 \begin_inset space ~
36867 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36868 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36871 \begin_layout Subsection
36873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36875 name "subsec:Export"
36882 \begin_layout Standard
36883 You can export your document to various file formats.
36884 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36886 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36887 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36888 during its configuration.
36891 \begin_layout Standard
36892 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36894 \begin_inset space ~
36898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36900 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36907 \begin_layout Description
36913 \begin_inset space ~
36916 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36918 \begin_inset space ~
36921 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36922 \begin_inset Newline newline
36925 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36926 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36930 \begin_layout Description
36931 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36937 \begin_layout Description
36939 \begin_inset space ~
36942 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36948 \begin_layout Description
36949 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36950 's native DVI-format.
36951 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36952 files paths or file names in your document.
36954 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36961 \begin_layout Description
36962 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
36963 in files paths or file names
36966 \begin_layout Description
36968 \begin_inset space ~
36975 ) DVI-format using the program
36977 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36980 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
36984 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36992 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37000 \begin_layout Description
37002 \begin_inset space ~
37005 (cropped) the same as
37009 but with cropped page margins.
37012 \begin_layout Description
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37017 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37021 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37026 \begin_layout Description
37030 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37038 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37046 \begin_layout Description
37048 \begin_inset space ~
37052 \begin_inset space ~
37055 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37059 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37067 \begin_layout Description
37071 \begin_inset space ~
37080 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37081 source that is compilable with the program
37083 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37087 \begin_layout Description
37091 \begin_inset space ~
37096 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37097 source, additionally all images used in the document
37098 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37102 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37105 \begin_layout Description
37109 \begin_inset space ~
37114 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37115 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37116 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37124 \begin_layout Description
37128 \begin_inset space ~
37137 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37138 source that is compilable with the program
37144 \begin_layout Description
37146 \begin_inset space ~
37150 \begin_inset space ~
37157 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37158 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37164 \begin_layout Description
37166 \begin_inset space ~
37169 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37170 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37176 \begin_inset space \space{}
37181 \begin_inset space ~
37185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37200 represent the version number)
37203 \begin_layout Description
37205 \begin_inset space ~
37209 \begin_inset space ~
37212 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37213 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37214 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37218 \begin_layout Description
37219 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37220 's internal XHTML engine
37223 \begin_layout Description
37225 \begin_inset space ~
37229 \begin_inset space ~
37233 \begin_inset space ~
37237 \begin_inset space ~
37240 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37245 For the conversion the program
37254 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37257 \begin_layout Description
37258 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37263 \begin_layout Description
37265 \begin_inset space ~
37268 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37270 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37273 For the conversion the program
37282 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37285 \begin_layout Description
37287 \begin_inset space ~
37290 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37291 For the conversion the program
37300 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37303 \begin_layout Description
37305 \begin_inset space ~
37308 (cropped) the same as
37311 \begin_inset space ~
37316 but with cropped page margins
37319 \begin_layout Description
37323 \begin_inset space ~
37328 PDF-format using the program
37332 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37335 \begin_layout Description
37339 \begin_inset space ~
37343 \begin_inset space ~
37351 \begin_inset space ~
37356 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37361 \begin_inset space \space{}
37364 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37368 \begin_layout Description
37372 \begin_inset space ~
37377 PDF-format using the program
37379 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37382 , produces PDF-files directly
37385 \begin_layout Description
37389 \begin_inset space ~
37394 PDF-format using the program
37398 , produces PDF-files directly
37401 \begin_layout Description
37405 \begin_inset space ~
37410 PDF-format using the program
37414 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37417 \begin_layout Description
37421 \begin_inset space ~
37426 PDF-format using the program
37431 , produces PDF-files directly
37434 \begin_layout Description
37438 \begin_inset space ~
37446 \begin_layout Description
37450 \begin_inset space ~
37454 \begin_inset space ~
37459 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37460 and then exported as text using the program
37465 \begin_layout Description
37470 PostScript format using the program
37478 options see section
37479 \begin_inset space ~
37483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37485 reference "subsec:General-output"
37492 \begin_layout Description
37493 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37494 source and also code in the statistical programming
37508 it is possible to use
37512 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37516 \begin_layout Standard
37517 If one of the menu entries
37524 \begin_inset space ~
37533 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37535 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37537 \begin_inset space ~
37541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37543 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37548 \begin_inset Index idx
37551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37552 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37561 \begin_layout Subsection
37565 \begin_layout Standard
37566 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37567 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37570 \begin_inset space ~
37574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37576 reference "sec:Paths"
37581 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37590 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37591 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37592 's preferences as described in section
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37599 reference "subsec:Converters"
37606 \begin_layout Subsection
37607 New and Close Window
37610 \begin_layout Standard
37611 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37615 \begin_layout Subsection
37619 \begin_layout Standard
37620 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37623 \begin_layout Section
37625 \begin_inset Index idx
37628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37637 \begin_layout Subsection
37641 \begin_layout Standard
37642 Described in section
37643 \begin_inset space ~
37647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37649 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37656 \begin_layout Subsection
37657 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37660 \begin_layout Standard
37661 Described in section
37662 \begin_inset space ~
37666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37668 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37675 \begin_layout Subsection
37679 \begin_layout Standard
37680 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37681 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37684 \begin_layout Subsection
37688 \begin_layout Standard
37689 Selects the whole document.
37692 \begin_layout Subsection
37693 Find & Replace (Quick)
37696 \begin_layout Standard
37697 Described in section
37698 \begin_inset space ~
37702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37704 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37711 \begin_layout Subsection
37712 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37715 \begin_layout Standard
37716 Described in section
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37723 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37730 \begin_layout Subsection
37731 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37734 \begin_layout Standard
37735 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37739 \begin_layout Subsection
37743 \begin_layout Standard
37744 Described in section
37745 \begin_inset space ~
37749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37751 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37758 \begin_layout Subsection
37760 \begin_inset Index idx
37763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37764 Paragraph ! Settings
37772 \begin_layout Standard
37773 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37774 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37778 \begin_layout Standard
37779 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37780 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37787 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37789 \begin_inset space ~
37797 \begin_layout Subsection
37798 Table and Rows & Columns
37801 \begin_layout Standard
37802 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37803 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37804 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37807 \begin_layout Subsection
37811 \begin_layout Standard
37812 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37813 It will dissolve this inset.
37814 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37818 \begin_layout Subsection
37822 \begin_layout Standard
37823 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37824 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37827 \begin_layout Subsection
37828 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37831 \begin_layout Standard
37832 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37834 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37835 \begin_inset space ~
37839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37841 reference "sec:Nesting"
37846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37848 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37855 \begin_layout Subsection
37858 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37861 \begin_layout Standard
37862 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37863 nts of the same type.
37865 \begin_inset space ~
37869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37871 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37875 for an explanation.
37878 \begin_layout Section
37880 \begin_inset Index idx
37883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37892 \begin_layout Standard
37893 At the bottom of the
37897 menu the opened documents are listed.
37900 \begin_layout Subsection
37901 Open/Close all Insets
37904 \begin_layout Standard
37905 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37908 \begin_layout Subsection
37909 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37912 \begin_layout Standard
37913 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37916 \begin_layout Standard
37917 Math macros are described in the
37924 \begin_layout Subsection
37928 \begin_layout Standard
37929 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37930 \begin_inset space ~
37934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37936 reference "sec:Navigating"
37941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37943 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37950 \begin_layout Subsection
37954 \begin_layout Standard
37955 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37957 \begin_inset space ~
37961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37963 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37970 \begin_layout Subsection
37974 \begin_layout Standard
37975 Opens a window showing console messages.
37976 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
37978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37981 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
37982 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
37983 is processing the document.
37986 \begin_layout Subsection
37988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37990 name "subsec:Toolbars"
37995 \begin_inset Index idx
37998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38007 \begin_layout Standard
38008 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38009 All toolbars and the
38012 \begin_inset space ~
38017 can be turned on and off.
38022 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38034 \begin_inset space ~
38046 \begin_inset space ~
38051 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38055 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38062 \begin_layout Standard
38067 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38071 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38072 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38073 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38074 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38075 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38078 \begin_layout Standard
38080 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38081 \begin_inset space ~
38085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38087 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38094 \begin_layout Subsection
38098 \begin_layout Standard
38102 \begin_inset space ~
38106 \begin_inset space ~
38110 \begin_inset space ~
38114 \begin_inset space ~
38118 \begin_inset space ~
38122 \begin_inset space ~
38127 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38128 's main window vertically while
38131 \begin_inset space ~
38135 \begin_inset space ~
38139 \begin_inset space ~
38143 \begin_inset space ~
38147 \begin_inset space ~
38151 \begin_inset space ~
38156 will split it horizontally.
38157 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38158 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38159 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38160 three or more documents at the same time.
38161 To close a split view, use the menu
38164 \begin_inset space ~
38168 \begin_inset space ~
38176 \begin_layout Subsection
38180 \begin_layout Standard
38181 Closes a split view.
38184 \begin_layout Subsection
38188 \begin_layout Standard
38189 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38190 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38191 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38192 's main window fullscreen.
38193 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38194 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38197 \begin_layout Section
38199 \begin_inset Index idx
38202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38211 \begin_layout Subsection
38215 \begin_layout Standard
38216 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38217 \begin_inset space ~
38221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38223 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38234 \begin_layout Subsection
38236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38238 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38245 \begin_layout Standard
38246 Here you can insert the following characters:
38249 \begin_layout Description
38254 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38257 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38258 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38259 -packages you have installed.
38260 You can get a complete display by checking
38263 \begin_inset space ~
38269 \begin_inset Newline newline
38273 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38281 Not all characters will be visible in the
38285 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38286 dialog (see section
38287 \begin_inset space ~
38291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38293 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38297 ) can display every character.
38305 \begin_layout Description
38306 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38310 \begin_layout Description
38312 \begin_inset space ~
38316 \begin_inset space ~
38319 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38320 \begin_inset space ~
38324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38326 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38333 \begin_layout Description
38335 \begin_inset space ~
38338 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38341 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38342 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38348 \begin_layout Description
38350 \begin_inset space ~
38353 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38357 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38363 \begin_layout Description
38365 \begin_inset space ~
38368 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38372 \begin_layout Description
38374 \begin_inset space ~
38377 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38381 \begin_layout Description
38383 \begin_inset space ~
38386 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38392 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38398 \begin_layout Description
38400 \begin_inset space ~
38403 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38407 \begin_layout Description
38409 \begin_inset space ~
38413 \begin_inset Index idx
38416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38423 \begin_inset Index idx
38426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38427 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38432 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38433 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38435 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38441 \begin_inset Index idx
38444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38452 \begin_inset Newline newline
38455 More information about this feature can be found in the
38461 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38467 \begin_layout Description
38468 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38470 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38471 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38475 \begin_layout Subsection
38479 \begin_layout Standard
38480 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38483 \begin_layout Description
38484 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38485 \begin_inset script superscript
38487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38496 \begin_layout Description
38497 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38498 \begin_inset script subscript
38500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38509 \begin_layout Description
38511 \begin_inset space ~
38514 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38515 \begin_inset space ~
38519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38521 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38528 \begin_layout Description
38530 \begin_inset space ~
38533 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38534 \begin_inset space ~
38538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38540 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38547 \begin_layout Description
38549 \begin_inset space ~
38552 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38553 \begin_inset space ~
38557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38559 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38566 \begin_layout Description
38568 \begin_inset space ~
38571 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38577 \begin_inset space \space{}
38580 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38581 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38590 To insert a fraction use the command
38595 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38599 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38608 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38615 \begin_layout Description
38617 \begin_inset space ~
38620 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38621 \begin_inset space ~
38625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38627 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38634 \begin_layout Description
38636 \begin_inset space ~
38639 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38640 \begin_inset space ~
38644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38646 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38653 \begin_layout Description
38655 \begin_inset space ~
38658 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38659 \begin_inset space ~
38663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38665 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38672 \begin_layout Description
38673 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38674 \begin_inset space ~
38678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38680 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38687 \begin_layout Description
38689 \begin_inset space ~
38692 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38693 \begin_inset space ~
38697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38699 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38706 \begin_layout Description
38708 \begin_inset space ~
38711 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38712 \begin_inset space ~
38716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38718 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38725 \begin_layout Description
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38731 \begin_inset space ~
38734 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38737 \begin_inset space ~
38741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38743 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38750 for a usage example.
38753 \begin_layout Description
38755 \begin_inset space ~
38759 \begin_inset space ~
38762 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38763 \begin_inset space ~
38767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38769 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38776 \begin_layout Description
38778 \begin_inset space ~
38781 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38782 as described in section
38783 \begin_inset space ~
38787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38789 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38796 \begin_layout Description
38798 \begin_inset space ~
38801 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38802 \begin_inset space ~
38806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38808 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38815 \begin_layout Description
38817 \begin_inset space ~
38820 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38821 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38823 \begin_inset space ~
38827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38829 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38836 \begin_layout Description
38838 \begin_inset space ~
38841 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38842 \begin_inset space ~
38846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38848 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38855 \begin_layout Description
38857 \begin_inset space ~
38861 \begin_inset space ~
38864 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38865 \begin_inset space ~
38869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38871 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38878 \begin_layout Subsection
38882 \begin_layout Standard
38883 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38887 \begin_inset space ~
38908 are described in section
38909 \begin_inset space ~
38913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38915 reference "sec:toc"
38924 is described in section
38925 \begin_inset space ~
38929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38931 reference "sec:Index"
38939 is described in section
38940 \begin_inset space ~
38944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38946 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38952 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38955 is described in section
38956 \begin_inset space ~
38960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38962 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
38969 \begin_layout Subsection
38973 \begin_layout Standard
38974 To insert floats, as described in section
38975 \begin_inset space ~
38979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38981 reference "sec:Floats"
38985 and in detail the chapter
38992 \begin_inset space ~
39000 \begin_layout Subsection
39004 \begin_layout Standard
39005 To insert notes, described in section
39006 \begin_inset space ~
39010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39012 reference "sec:Notes"
39019 \begin_layout Subsection
39023 \begin_layout Standard
39024 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39026 Branches are described in section
39027 \begin_inset space ~
39031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39033 reference "sec:Branches"
39040 \begin_layout Subsection
39044 \begin_layout Standard
39045 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39046 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39048 An example is the document class
39049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39056 with three custom insets.
39059 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39063 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39069 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39072 \begin_layout Subsection
39074 \begin_inset Index idx
39077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39086 \begin_layout Standard
39087 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39089 For more information see chapter
39091 External Document Parts
39094 \begin_inset space ~
39100 \begin_layout Subsection
39102 \begin_inset Index idx
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39114 \begin_layout Standard
39115 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39116 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39123 \begin_inset space ~
39131 \begin_layout Subsection
39135 \begin_layout Standard
39140 dialog as described in section
39141 \begin_inset space ~
39145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39147 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39154 \begin_layout Subsection
39158 \begin_layout Standard
39163 as described in section
39164 \begin_inset space ~
39168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39170 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39177 \begin_layout Subsection
39181 \begin_layout Standard
39186 as described in section
39187 \begin_inset space ~
39191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39193 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39200 \begin_layout Subsection
39202 \begin_inset Index idx
39205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39212 \begin_inset Index idx
39215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39216 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39224 \begin_layout Standard
39225 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39226 Floats are described in section
39227 \begin_inset space ~
39231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39233 reference "sec:Floats"
39237 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39239 Multi-page Captions
39244 \begin_inset space ~
39252 \begin_layout Subsection
39256 \begin_layout Standard
39257 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39258 \begin_inset space ~
39262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39264 reference "sec:Index"
39271 \begin_layout Subsection
39275 \begin_layout Standard
39276 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39277 \begin_inset space ~
39281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39283 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39290 \begin_layout Subsection
39294 \begin_layout Standard
39295 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39296 Tables are described in section
39297 \begin_inset space ~
39301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39303 reference "sec:Tables"
39307 and in detail in the chapter
39314 \begin_inset space ~
39322 \begin_layout Subsection
39326 \begin_layout Standard
39332 Graphics are described in section
39333 \begin_inset space ~
39337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39339 reference "sec:Graphics"
39346 \begin_layout Subsection
39350 \begin_layout Standard
39351 Inserts a URL as described in section
39352 \begin_inset space ~
39356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39358 reference "subsec:URLs"
39365 \begin_layout Subsection
39369 \begin_layout Standard
39370 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39371 \begin_inset space ~
39375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39377 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39384 \begin_layout Subsection
39388 \begin_layout Standard
39389 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39390 \begin_inset space ~
39394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39396 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39403 \begin_layout Subsection
39407 \begin_layout Standard
39408 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39409 \begin_inset space ~
39413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39415 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39422 \begin_layout Subsection
39426 \begin_layout Standard
39427 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39428 title or caption of a float.
39429 Inserts a short title as described in section
39430 \begin_inset space ~
39434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39436 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39443 \begin_layout Subsection
39448 \begin_layout Standard
39449 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39450 Code box as described in section
39451 \begin_inset space ~
39455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39457 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39464 \begin_layout Subsection
39466 \begin_inset Index idx
39469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39478 \begin_layout Standard
39479 Inserts a program listings box.
39480 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39482 Program Code Listings
39487 \begin_inset space ~
39495 \begin_layout Subsection
39499 \begin_layout Standard
39500 Inserts the actual date.
39501 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39506 \begin_layout Subsection
39510 \begin_layout Standard
39511 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39512 \begin_inset space ~
39516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39518 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39525 \begin_layout Section
39527 \begin_inset Index idx
39530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39539 \begin_layout Standard
39540 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39541 \begin_inset space ~
39544 of the current document.
39545 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39548 \begin_layout Subsection
39552 \begin_layout Standard
39553 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39554 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39555 to jump, for example, between section
39556 \begin_inset space ~
39560 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39561 \begin_inset space ~
39564 2.5 and use the submenu
39567 \begin_inset space ~
39571 \begin_inset space ~
39578 \begin_inset space ~
39584 \begin_inset space ~
39588 \begin_inset space ~
39594 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39598 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39604 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39607 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39610 \begin_layout Standard
39611 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39615 \begin_inset space ~
39620 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39623 \begin_inset space ~
39628 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39631 \begin_layout Subsection
39632 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39635 \begin_layout Standard
39636 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39640 \begin_layout Subsection
39644 \begin_layout Standard
39645 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39646 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39647 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39651 \begin_inset space ~
39655 \begin_inset space ~
39663 \begin_layout Subsection
39667 \begin_layout Standard
39668 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39671 The \SpecialChar LyX
39672 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39674 \begin_inset space ~
39682 \begin_inset space ~
39687 manual for a detailed description.
39690 \begin_layout Section
39692 \begin_inset Index idx
39695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39704 \begin_layout Subsection
39708 \begin_layout Standard
39709 Change Tracking is described in section
39710 \begin_inset space ~
39714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39716 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39723 \begin_layout Subsection
39731 \begin_layout Standard
39732 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39733 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39734 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39736 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39737 to the clipboard or update the view.
39738 \begin_inset Newline newline
39741 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39745 \begin_layout Standard
39748 Open Containing Directory
39750 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39751 's temporary folder for the document.
39752 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39753 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39754 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39755 For example some journals require to send the
39759 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39763 \begin_layout Subsection
39764 Start Appendix Here
39767 \begin_layout Standard
39768 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39769 as described in section
39770 \begin_inset space ~
39774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39776 reference "sec:Appendices"
39783 \begin_layout Subsection
39785 \begin_inset space ~
39791 \begin_layout Standard
39792 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39793 default output format for the document (menu
39795 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39796 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39797 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39799 \begin_inset space ~
39803 \begin_inset space ~
39809 \begin_inset space ~
39813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39815 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39819 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39822 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39823 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39825 \begin_inset space ~
39828 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39830 \begin_inset space ~
39833 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39835 \begin_inset space ~
39839 \begin_inset space ~
39845 \begin_inset space ~
39849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39851 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39855 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39856 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39858 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39859 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39861 \begin_inset space ~
39864 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39866 \begin_inset space ~
39869 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39873 \begin_inset space ~
39877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39879 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39884 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39885 when it is first configured.
39886 The default output format is
39889 \begin_inset space ~
39897 \begin_layout Subsection
39898 View (Other Formats)
39901 \begin_layout Standard
39902 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39903 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39904 actual document with an external program.
39905 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39906 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39907 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39909 All possible formats are listed in section
39910 \begin_inset space ~
39914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39916 reference "subsec:Export"
39921 You should at least see the menu entry
39926 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39928 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39930 \begin_inset space ~
39934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39936 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39941 \begin_inset Index idx
39944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39945 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39954 \begin_layout Standard
39955 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39956 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39958 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39959 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39961 \begin_inset space ~
39964 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39966 \begin_inset space ~
39969 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39979 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39984 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39985 when it is first configured.
39988 \begin_layout Subsection
39990 \begin_inset space ~
39996 \begin_layout Standard
39997 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
39998 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40001 \begin_layout Subsection
40002 Update (Other Formats)
40005 \begin_layout Standard
40006 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40007 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40010 \begin_layout Subsection
40011 View Master Document
40014 \begin_layout Standard
40015 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40031 \begin_inset space ~
40036 manual for more information on this topic).
40037 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40038 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40042 \begin_inset space ~
40046 \begin_inset space ~
40051 generates the output of the whole book, while
40055 will just output the chapter alone.
40058 \begin_layout Standard
40059 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40060 in the document settings (menu
40062 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40063 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40064 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40066 \begin_inset space ~
40070 \begin_inset space ~
40076 \begin_inset space ~
40080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40082 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40086 ) or in the preferences (menu
40088 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40089 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40091 \begin_inset space ~
40094 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40096 \begin_inset space ~
40099 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40101 \begin_inset space ~
40105 \begin_inset space ~
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40117 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40124 \begin_layout Subsection
40125 Update Master Document
40128 \begin_layout Standard
40129 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40145 \begin_inset space ~
40150 manual for more information on this topic).
40151 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40152 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40155 \begin_layout Standard
40156 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40157 in the document settings (menu
40159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40160 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40161 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40163 \begin_inset space ~
40167 \begin_inset space ~
40173 \begin_inset space ~
40177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40179 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40183 ) or in the preferences (menu
40185 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40186 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40191 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40196 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40198 \begin_inset space ~
40202 \begin_inset space ~
40208 \begin_inset space ~
40212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40214 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40221 \begin_layout Subsection
40223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40225 name "subsec:Compressed"
40232 \begin_layout Standard
40233 Un/compresses the current document.
40234 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40235 compression (see the
40237 Additional Features
40239 manual for details).
40242 \begin_layout Subsection
40246 \begin_layout Standard
40247 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40250 \begin_layout Subsection
40254 \begin_layout Standard
40255 The document settings are described in appendix
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40262 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40269 \begin_layout Section
40271 \begin_inset Index idx
40274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40283 \begin_layout Subsection
40287 \begin_layout Standard
40288 Spell checking is explained in section
40289 \begin_inset space ~
40293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40295 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40302 \begin_layout Subsection
40306 \begin_layout Standard
40307 The thesaurus is described in section
40308 \begin_inset space ~
40312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40314 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40321 \begin_layout Subsection
40323 \begin_inset Index idx
40326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40333 \begin_inset Index idx
40336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40345 \begin_layout Standard
40346 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40347 the highlighted document part.
40350 \begin_layout Subsection
40356 \begin_inset Index idx
40359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40360 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40369 \begin_layout Standard
40370 Generates with the help of the program
40372 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40375 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40376 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40377 This feature is not available on Windows.
40380 \begin_layout Subsection
40386 \begin_inset Index idx
40389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40399 \begin_layout Standard
40400 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40405 \begin_inset space ~
40410 to see the full filename paths.
40413 \begin_layout Subsection
40415 \begin_inset Index idx
40418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40427 \begin_layout Standard
40428 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40429 files as described in section
40430 \begin_inset space ~
40434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40436 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40443 \begin_layout Subsection
40445 \begin_inset Index idx
40448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40461 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40479 \begin_inset Index idx
40482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40483 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40492 \begin_layout Standard
40493 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40494 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40495 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40496 -packages and programs it needs; see
40498 \begin_inset space ~
40502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40504 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40511 \begin_layout Subsection
40515 \begin_layout Standard
40520 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40521 \begin_inset space ~
40525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40527 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40534 \begin_layout Section
40536 \begin_inset Index idx
40539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40548 \begin_layout Standard
40549 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40550 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40552 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40556 \begin_layout Standard
40560 \begin_inset space ~
40565 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40566 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40567 packages and classes found
40568 by \SpecialChar LyX
40570 \begin_inset space ~
40574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40576 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40583 \begin_layout Standard
40587 \begin_inset space ~
40592 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40597 \begin_layout Section
40599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40601 name "sec:Toolbars"
40608 \begin_layout Standard
40609 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40616 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40623 \begin_layout Standard
40624 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40625 This is described in the
40627 Additional Features
40632 \begin_layout Subsection
40634 \begin_inset Index idx
40637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40646 \begin_layout Standard
40647 \begin_inset Graphics
40648 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40656 \begin_layout Standard
40657 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40663 \begin_layout Standard
40664 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40681 \begin_inset Note Note
40684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40685 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40690 manual for more information.
40698 \begin_layout Standard
40699 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40705 \begin_layout Standard
40706 \begin_inset Tabular
40707 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40708 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40709 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40710 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40716 \begin_inset Graphics
40717 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40731 pull-down box for the environments
40744 \begin_layout Standard
40745 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40751 \begin_layout Standard
40753 \begin_inset Tabular
40754 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40755 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40756 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40757 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40758 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40781 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40811 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40841 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40848 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40857 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40871 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40878 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40887 arg "spelling-continuously"
40895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40899 Spellcheck continuously
40905 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40928 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40988 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41018 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41048 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41064 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41078 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41104 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41118 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41137 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41146 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41160 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41161 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41189 Emphasize text, function of the
41191 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41196 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41226 Set text to noun style, function of the
41228 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41230 \begin_inset space ~
41233 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41251 arg "textstyle-apply"
41259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41263 Format text using the current settings in the
41265 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41267 \begin_inset space ~
41270 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41303 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41323 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41337 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41351 arg "tabular-insert"
41359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41372 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41381 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41393 Toggle outline window on/off,
41395 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41402 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41411 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41423 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41438 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41450 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41463 \begin_layout Subsection
41465 \begin_inset Index idx
41468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41477 \begin_layout Standard
41478 \begin_inset Graphics
41479 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41487 \begin_layout Standard
41488 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41494 \begin_layout Standard
41495 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41499 \begin_layout Standard
41500 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41506 \begin_layout Standard
41507 \begin_inset Tabular
41508 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41509 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41510 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41511 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41539 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41548 arg "layout Enumerate"
41556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41575 arg "layout Itemize"
41583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41629 arg "layout Description"
41637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41647 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41656 arg "depth-increment"
41664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41670 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41672 \begin_inset space ~
41676 \begin_inset space ~
41685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41694 arg "depth-decrement"
41702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41708 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41710 \begin_inset space ~
41714 \begin_inset space ~
41723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41732 arg "float-insert figure"
41740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41747 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41763 arg "float-insert table"
41771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41778 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41785 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41815 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41824 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41854 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41875 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41900 \begin_inset space ~
41909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41918 arg "nomencl-insert"
41926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41934 \begin_inset space ~
41943 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41952 arg "footnote-insert"
41960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41982 arg "marginalnote-insert"
41990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41998 \begin_inset space ~
42007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42030 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42031 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42033 \begin_inset space ~
42042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42051 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42065 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42127 \begin_inset space ~
42136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42145 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42160 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42167 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42176 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42191 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42193 \begin_inset space ~
42202 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42211 arg "dialog-show character"
42219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42225 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42227 \begin_inset space ~
42230 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42237 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42246 arg "layout-paragraph"
42254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42260 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42262 \begin_inset space ~
42271 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42280 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42308 \begin_layout Subsection
42309 View/Update Toolbar
42310 \begin_inset Index idx
42313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42314 Toolbar ! View / Update
42322 \begin_layout Standard
42323 \begin_inset Graphics
42324 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42331 \begin_layout Standard
42332 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42338 \begin_layout Standard
42339 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42343 \begin_layout Standard
42344 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42350 \begin_layout Standard
42351 \begin_inset Tabular
42352 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42353 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42354 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42355 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42379 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42395 arg "buffer-update"
42403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42409 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42425 arg "master-buffer-view"
42433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42439 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42441 \begin_inset space ~
42450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42459 arg "master-buffer-update"
42467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42475 \begin_inset space ~
42479 \begin_inset space ~
42488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42497 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42512 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42513 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42514 Synchronize with Output
42520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42543 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42544 View (Other Formats)
42550 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42557 arg "update-others"
42565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42571 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42572 Update (Other Formats)
42585 \begin_layout Standard
42586 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42590 \begin_layout Subsection
42594 \begin_layout Standard
42595 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42596 \begin_inset space ~
42600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42602 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42606 , the table toolbar
42607 \begin_inset Index idx
42610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42619 \begin_inset space ~
42624 manual and the math macro toolbar
42625 \begin_inset Index idx
42628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42641 \begin_layout Chapter
42642 The Document Settings
42643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42645 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42650 \begin_inset Index idx
42653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42654 Document ! Settings
42662 \begin_layout Standard
42666 \begin_inset space ~
42671 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42672 is called with the menu
42674 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42678 You can save your document settings as default with the
42680 Save as Document Defaults
42682 button in any dialog.
42683 This will create a template named
42687 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42688 when you create a new document without
42692 \begin_layout Standard
42697 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42698 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42701 \begin_layout Standard
42702 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42703 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42704 to find the one you are looking for.
42705 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42706 the submenus of the dialog.
42708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42712 \begin_inset space \space{}
42716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42723 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42724 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42725 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42728 \begin_layout Section
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42735 Document classes are described in section
42736 \begin_inset space ~
42740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42742 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42750 \begin_layout Standard
42754 \begin_inset space ~
42759 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42764 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42765 as a layout for a document class.
42766 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42768 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42777 \begin_layout Standard
42778 Some classes use special class options by default.
42779 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42783 and you can decide to use them or not.
42784 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42785 recommended you leave them untouched.
42790 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42791 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42796 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42798 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42804 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42805 \begin_inset Newline newline
42810 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42813 \begin_inset Newline newline
42816 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42817 distribution, see section
42822 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42824 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42837 \begin_layout Standard
42842 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42843 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42844 in the background if the child document
42845 is opened without its master.
42846 This way child documents are always compilable.
42847 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42854 \begin_inset space ~
42862 \begin_layout Standard
42863 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42874 \begin_inset Index idx
42877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42879 packages ! prettyref
42885 \begin_inset Index idx
42888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42890 packages ! refstyle
42895 for cross-references, see section
42896 \begin_inset space ~
42900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42902 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42909 \begin_layout Section
42913 \begin_layout Standard
42914 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42915 Please refer to the section
42918 \begin_inset space ~
42926 \begin_inset space ~
42931 manual for details.
42934 \begin_layout Section
42938 \begin_layout Standard
42939 Modules are explained in section
42940 \begin_inset space ~
42944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42946 reference "subsec:Modules"
42953 \begin_layout Section
42957 \begin_layout Standard
42959 \begin_inset space ~
42963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42965 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
42972 \begin_layout Section
42976 \begin_layout Standard
42977 The document font settings are described in section
42978 \begin_inset space ~
42982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42984 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
42991 \begin_layout Section
42995 \begin_layout Standard
42996 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43008 \begin_inset space ~
43013 and whether it should be a
43016 \begin_inset space ~
43021 can also be specified here.
43024 \begin_layout Standard
43025 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43026 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43027 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43029 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43032 \begin_layout Standard
43035 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43038 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43039 justifies the text on screen.
43040 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43044 \begin_layout Section
43048 \begin_layout Standard
43049 This dialog is described in sections
43050 \begin_inset space ~
43054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43056 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43063 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43070 \begin_layout Section
43074 \begin_layout Standard
43075 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43082 reference "subsec:Margins"
43089 \begin_layout Section
43091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43093 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43098 \begin_inset Index idx
43101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43102 Language ! Encoding
43110 \begin_layout Standard
43111 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43112 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43113 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43115 is always encoded in utf8).
43116 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43117 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43118 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43119 -command is not known for
43120 a particular character).
43123 \begin_layout Standard
43124 If you use the option
43129 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43130 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43131 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43133 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43134 exactly one encoding.
43135 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43138 \begin_layout Standard
43140 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43141 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43142 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43143 installation supports Unicode), choose
43144 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43145 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43146 is quite incomplete, so
43147 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43152 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43153 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43154 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43155 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43156 -commands is not used, because all
43157 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43158 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43159 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43160 , two new alternative engines
43161 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43163 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43165 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43168 \begin_inset space ~
43176 \begin_inset space ~
43184 \begin_inset space ~
43190 \begin_inset space ~
43194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43196 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43201 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43205 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43208 \begin_layout Standard
43212 \begin_inset space ~
43217 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43218 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43228 The possible settings are:
43231 \begin_layout Description
43232 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43234 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43235 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43239 \begin_inset space ~
43243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43245 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43252 \begin_layout Description
43253 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43254 format you will use.
43255 In many cases this will be
43260 \begin_inset Index idx
43263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43271 If the newer package
43276 \begin_inset Index idx
43279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43281 packages ! polyglossia
43286 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43287 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43288 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43290 this package will be used instead of
43297 \begin_layout Description
43299 \begin_inset space ~
43310 would be more appropriate.
43313 \begin_layout Description
43314 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43315 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43319 (for German texts), type in
43322 \begin_inset Newline newline
43327 usepackage{ngerman}
43330 \begin_layout Description
43331 None will not use a language package.
43332 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43335 \begin_layout Standard
43336 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43339 \begin_layout Description
43341 \begin_inset space ~
43345 \begin_inset space ~
43349 \begin_inset space ~
43356 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43362 \begin_inset Index idx
43365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43367 packages ! inputenc
43373 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43374 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43375 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43379 \begin_layout Description
43380 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43382 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43383 commands, which may result in a big
43384 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43385 -commands are needed.
43388 \begin_layout Description
43390 \begin_inset space ~
43394 \begin_inset space ~
43397 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43400 \begin_layout Description
43402 \begin_inset space ~
43406 \begin_inset space ~
43409 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43412 \begin_layout Description
43414 \begin_inset space ~
43417 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43420 \begin_layout Description
43422 \begin_inset space ~
43426 \begin_inset space ~
43429 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43430 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43433 \begin_layout Description
43435 \begin_inset space ~
43439 \begin_inset space ~
43442 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43446 \begin_layout Description
43448 \begin_inset space ~
43452 \begin_inset space ~
43455 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43456 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43459 \begin_layout Description
43461 \begin_inset space ~
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43469 \begin_inset space ~
43472 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43473 \begin_inset space ~
43479 \begin_layout Description
43481 \begin_inset space ~
43485 \begin_inset space ~
43489 \begin_inset space ~
43492 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43493 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43496 \begin_layout Description
43498 \begin_inset space ~
43502 \begin_inset space ~
43505 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43506 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43507 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43508 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43509 \begin_inset space ~
43513 \begin_inset space ~
43519 \begin_layout Description
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43525 \begin_inset space ~
43528 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43529 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43530 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43532 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43533 \begin_inset space ~
43537 \begin_inset space ~
43543 \begin_layout Description
43545 \begin_inset space ~
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43552 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43555 \begin_layout Description
43557 \begin_inset space ~
43561 \begin_inset space ~
43564 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43567 \begin_layout Description
43569 \begin_inset space ~
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43576 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43579 \begin_layout Description
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43584 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43587 \begin_layout Description
43589 \begin_inset space ~
43592 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43595 \begin_layout Description
43597 \begin_inset space ~
43601 \begin_inset space ~
43604 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43607 \begin_layout Description
43609 \begin_inset space ~
43613 \begin_inset space ~
43619 \begin_layout Description
43621 \begin_inset space ~
43625 \begin_inset space ~
43628 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43631 \begin_layout Description
43633 \begin_inset space ~
43637 \begin_inset space ~
43643 \begin_layout Description
43645 \begin_inset space ~
43649 \begin_inset space ~
43652 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43658 \begin_inset Index idx
43661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43668 , when using this, set the document language to
43673 \begin_layout Description
43675 \begin_inset space ~
43679 \begin_inset space ~
43682 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43687 , when using this, set the document language to
43690 \begin_inset space ~
43696 \begin_layout Description
43698 \begin_inset space ~
43702 \begin_inset space ~
43705 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43711 \begin_inset Index idx
43714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43716 packages ! japanese
43721 , when using this, set the document language to
43726 \begin_layout Description
43728 \begin_inset space ~
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43735 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43740 , when using this, set the document language to
43745 \begin_layout Description
43747 \begin_inset space ~
43751 \begin_inset space ~
43754 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43759 , when using this, set the document language to
43764 \begin_layout Description
43766 \begin_inset space ~
43769 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43772 \begin_layout Description
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43778 \begin_inset space ~
43782 \begin_inset space ~
43785 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43788 \begin_layout Description
43790 \begin_inset space ~
43794 \begin_inset space ~
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43801 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43802 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43803 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43806 \begin_layout Description
43808 \begin_inset space ~
43812 \begin_inset space ~
43818 \begin_layout Description
43820 \begin_inset space ~
43824 \begin_inset space ~
43827 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43828 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43831 \begin_layout Description
43833 \begin_inset space ~
43837 \begin_inset space ~
43840 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43846 \begin_inset Index idx
43849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43856 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43859 \begin_layout Description
43861 \begin_inset space ~
43869 \begin_inset space ~
43872 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43879 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43882 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43889 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43890 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43892 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43895 \begin_layout Description
43897 \begin_inset space ~
43901 \begin_inset space ~
43904 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43910 \begin_inset Index idx
43913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43920 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43923 \begin_layout Description
43925 \begin_inset space ~
43928 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43934 \begin_inset Index idx
43937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43939 packages ! inputenc
43945 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43949 \begin_layout Description
43951 \begin_inset space ~
43955 \begin_inset space ~
43959 \begin_inset space ~
43962 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43963 \begin_inset space ~
43969 \begin_layout Description
43971 \begin_inset space ~
43975 \begin_inset space ~
43979 \begin_inset space ~
43982 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
43983 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
43984 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
43988 \begin_layout Description
43990 \begin_inset space ~
43994 \begin_inset space ~
43998 \begin_inset space ~
44001 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44002 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44005 \begin_layout Section
44007 \begin_inset Index idx
44010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44017 \begin_inset Index idx
44020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44027 \begin_inset Index idx
44030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44031 Color ! Shaded boxes
44037 \begin_inset Index idx
44040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44041 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44049 \begin_layout Standard
44050 Here you can alter the font color for the
44054 (default: black), for
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44062 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44066 (default: white) and for
44069 \begin_inset space ~
44079 sets the color back to the default.
44082 \begin_layout Standard
44083 Clicking any button showing
44091 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44092 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44093 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44094 later more quickly.
44097 \begin_layout Standard
44098 Note, if you change the
44101 \begin_inset space ~
44106 font color and use the option
44109 \begin_inset space ~
44114 in the document settings under
44117 \begin_inset space ~
44122 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44123 \begin_inset space ~
44127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44129 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44136 \begin_layout Standard
44137 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44143 \begin_layout Standard
44147 \begin_inset space ~
44156 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44159 \begin_inset space ~
44162 Code after a forced page break:
44165 \begin_layout Itemize
44166 For the page color:
44167 \begin_inset Newline newline
44174 pagecolor{color name}
44177 \begin_layout Itemize
44178 For the text color:
44179 \begin_inset Newline newline
44189 \begin_layout Standard
44190 You are restricted to one of
44226 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44233 \begin_inset space ~
44239 \begin_inset Newline newline
44242 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44243 names to refer to them:
44246 \begin_layout Itemize
44252 \begin_inset Newline newline
44257 page_backgroundcolor
44260 \begin_layout Itemize
44264 \begin_inset space ~
44270 \begin_inset Newline newline
44278 \begin_layout Itemize
44282 \begin_inset space ~
44288 \begin_inset Newline newline
44296 \begin_layout Itemize
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44306 \begin_inset Newline newline
44314 \begin_layout Standard
44315 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44318 \begin_inset space ~
44326 \begin_inset space ~
44334 \begin_layout Section
44338 \begin_layout Standard
44339 Here you can adjust the
44343 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44347 as described in section
44348 \begin_inset space ~
44352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44354 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44361 \begin_layout Section
44365 \begin_layout Standard
44366 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44372 \begin_inset Index idx
44375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44377 packages ! biblatex
44387 \begin_inset Index idx
44390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44402 \begin_inset Index idx
44405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44413 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44416 Sectioned bibliography
44418 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44424 \begin_inset Index idx
44427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44429 packages ! bibtopic
44439 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44440 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44444 for the generation of the bibliography.
44445 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44446 \begin_inset space ~
44450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44452 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44459 \begin_layout Section
44463 \begin_layout Standard
44464 Here you can define the
44468 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44470 \begin_inset space ~
44474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44476 reference "sec:Index"
44483 \begin_layout Section
44487 \begin_layout Standard
44488 The PDF properties are explained in section
44489 \begin_inset space ~
44493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44495 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44502 \begin_layout Section
44506 \begin_layout Standard
44507 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44508 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44514 \begin_inset Index idx
44517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44529 \begin_inset Index idx
44532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44544 \begin_inset Index idx
44547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44559 \begin_inset Index idx
44562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44574 \begin_inset Index idx
44577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44579 packages ! mathdots
44589 \begin_inset Index idx
44592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44594 packages ! mathtools
44604 \begin_inset Index idx
44607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44619 \begin_inset Index idx
44622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44624 packages ! stackrel
44634 \begin_inset Index idx
44637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44639 packages ! stmaryrd
44649 \begin_inset Index idx
44652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44654 packages ! undertilde
44659 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44662 \begin_layout Description
44663 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44664 -errors in formulas,
44665 ensure that you have this enabled.
44668 \begin_layout Description
44669 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44670 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44671 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44675 \begin_layout Description
44676 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44679 \begin_inset space ~
44691 \begin_layout Description
44692 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44695 \begin_inset space ~
44707 \begin_layout Description
44708 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44719 \begin_layout Description
44720 mathtools is used for the math commands
44756 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44763 \begin_layout Description
44764 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44766 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44775 \begin_layout Description
44776 stackrel is used for the math command
44793 \begin_layout Description
44794 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44797 \begin_layout Description
44798 undertilde is used for the math command
44806 Accents for one Character
44815 \begin_layout Section
44819 \begin_layout Standard
44820 The float placement options are described in the section
44823 \begin_inset space ~
44831 \begin_inset space ~
44839 \begin_layout Section
44843 \begin_layout Standard
44844 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44846 Program Code Listings
44851 \begin_inset space ~
44859 \begin_layout Section
44863 \begin_layout Standard
44864 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44872 set to be used and set the
44877 The itemize environment is described in section
44878 \begin_inset space ~
44882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44884 reference "sec:Itemize"
44891 \begin_layout Standard
44892 You can furthermore specify a
44895 \begin_inset space ~
44900 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44901 command of the desired character.
44902 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44909 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44915 \begin_inset space \space{}
44919 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44929 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44930 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44933 \begin_layout Standard
44934 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44942 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44943 -packages in the preamble (menu
44946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44947 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44950 \begin_inset space ~
44956 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
44960 usepackage{textcomp}
44963 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
44967 usepackage{amssymb}
44977 \begin_layout Section
44981 \begin_layout Standard
44982 Branches are described in section
44983 \begin_inset space ~
44987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44989 reference "sec:Branches"
44996 \begin_layout Section
44998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45000 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45007 \begin_layout Standard
45008 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45011 \begin_layout Description
45013 \begin_inset space ~
45017 \begin_inset space ~
45020 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45040 View Master Document
45041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45048 Update Master Document
45049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45056 menu or the toolbar.
45057 The default is set in
45059 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45060 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45062 \begin_inset space ~
45065 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45069 \begin_inset space ~
45073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45075 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45082 \begin_layout Description
45084 \begin_inset space ~
45088 \begin_inset space ~
45091 Output settings for the menu
45093 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45095 \begin_inset space ~
45101 For a detailed description see section
45103 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45108 \begin_inset space ~
45116 \begin_layout Description
45118 \begin_inset space ~
45122 \begin_inset space ~
45125 Options offers settings for the export format
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45138 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45139 \begin_inset space ~
45142 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45146 \begin_inset space ~
45151 settings are described in detail in section
45153 Math Output in XHTML
45158 \begin_inset space ~
45167 \begin_inset space ~
45171 \begin_inset space ~
45176 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45179 \begin_layout Description
45181 \begin_inset space ~
45186 Save transient properties
45188 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45189 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45190 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45194 \begin_layout Itemize
45195 the activation of change tracking
45198 \begin_layout Itemize
45199 the output of tracked changes
45202 \begin_layout Itemize
45203 the recording of the document directory path.
45206 \begin_layout Standard
45207 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45208 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45212 \begin_layout Section
45220 \begin_layout Standard
45221 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45223 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45225 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45227 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45231 \begin_layout Standard
45232 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45233 -syntax is given in section
45234 \begin_inset space ~
45238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45240 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45247 \begin_layout Chapter
45253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45255 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45260 \begin_inset Index idx
45263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45272 \begin_layout Standard
45273 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45275 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45279 It has the following submenus.
45282 \begin_layout Section
45286 \begin_layout Subsection
45290 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45291 User Interface File
45292 \begin_inset Index idx
45295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45296 Customization ! of toolbars
45302 \begin_inset Index idx
45305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45306 Customization ! of menus
45314 \begin_layout Standard
45315 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45316 interface (ui) file.
45317 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45325 \begin_layout Description
45330 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45333 \begin_layout Description
45340 the menu entries in popup context menus
45343 \begin_layout Description
45348 specifies the toolbar buttons
45351 \begin_layout Standard
45352 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45353 and edit the entries.
45356 \begin_layout Standard
45357 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45369 entries must be finished with an explicit
45394 and in the case of the
45395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45407 The syntax for the entries is:
45410 \begin_layout Standard
45411 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45440 \begin_layout Standard
45442 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45445 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45446 -functions are listed in the menu
45448 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45450 \begin_inset space ~
45458 \begin_layout Standard
45459 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45465 \begin_layout Standard
45466 For example, assuming you use the menu
45468 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45471 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45475 \begin_layout Standard
45476 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45500 \begin_layout Standard
45502 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45517 to have the sixth bookmark.
45520 \begin_layout Standard
45524 \begin_inset space ~
45529 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45530 's toolbar buttons.
45531 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45532 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45535 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45547 \begin_layout Standard
45550 Enable tool tips in main work area
45552 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45556 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45560 \begin_layout Standard
45565 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45566 should display in the menu
45568 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45570 \begin_inset space ~
45578 \begin_layout Subsection
45582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45586 \begin_layout Standard
45589 Restore window layouts and geometries
45592 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45593 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45597 \begin_layout Standard
45600 Restore cursor positions
45602 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45606 \begin_layout Standard
45609 Load opened files from last session
45611 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45615 \begin_layout Standard
45618 Clear all session information
45620 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45621 sessions (cursor positions, names
45622 of last opened documents, etc.).
45625 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45629 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45634 \begin_inset Index idx
45637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45646 \begin_layout Standard
45649 Backup original documents when saving
45651 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45652 it was saved the last time.
45653 It is stored in the
45656 \begin_inset space ~
45662 \begin_inset space ~
45666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45668 reference "sec:Paths"
45672 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45675 \begin_inset space ~
45681 The backup file has the file extension
45682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45696 \begin_layout Standard
45699 Backup documents, every
45701 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45704 \begin_layout Standard
45707 Save documents compressed by default
45709 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45710 \begin_inset space ~
45714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45716 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45721 This applies to newly created documents only.
45722 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45726 Windows & work area
45729 \begin_layout Standard
45732 Open documents in tabs
45734 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45738 \begin_layout Standard
45743 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45750 \begin_inset space ~
45754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45756 reference "sec:Paths"
45760 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45767 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45768 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45769 of \SpecialChar LyX
45771 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45772 instance is created for each file.
45775 \begin_layout Standard
45778 Single close-tab button
45780 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45790 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45791 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45792 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45796 \begin_layout Standard
45797 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45805 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45806 before the change takes effect.
45814 \begin_layout Standard
45819 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45821 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45823 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45827 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45828 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45829 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45832 \begin_layout Subsection
45834 \begin_inset Index idx
45837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45846 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45853 \begin_layout Standard
45854 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45858 \begin_layout Standard
45859 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45867 This section only deals with the fonts
45871 the \SpecialChar LyX
45873 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45877 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45888 \begin_layout Standard
45889 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45906 (depends on the system) as its
45909 \begin_inset space ~
45925 \begin_layout Standard
45926 You can change the font size with the
45933 \begin_layout Standard
45938 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45943 points have the size of 1
45944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45948 \begin_inset space ~
45952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45954 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45959 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45964 The sizes are explained in detail in section
45965 \begin_inset space ~
45969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45971 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
45978 \begin_layout Standard
45981 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
45983 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
45984 needs to redraw the screen less often.
45985 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
45986 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
45987 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
45989 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
45990 \begin_inset space ~
45996 \begin_layout Subsection
45998 \begin_inset Index idx
46001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46002 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46009 \begin_inset Index idx
46012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46021 \begin_layout Standard
46022 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46023 by choosing an item in the
46024 list and selecting the
46031 \begin_layout Standard
46032 By checking the option
46036 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46039 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46040 \begin_inset space ~
46044 \begin_inset space ~
46049 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46052 \begin_layout Subsection
46054 \begin_inset Index idx
46057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46066 \begin_layout Standard
46067 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46071 \begin_layout Standard
46076 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46077 This feature is described in section
46078 \begin_inset space ~
46082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46084 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46091 \begin_layout Standard
46092 Checking the option
46095 \begin_inset space ~
46099 \begin_inset space ~
46103 \begin_inset space ~
46108 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46111 \begin_layout Section
46113 \begin_inset Index idx
46116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46125 \begin_layout Subsection
46129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46133 \begin_layout Standard
46136 Cursor follows scrollbar
46138 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46142 \begin_layout Standard
46143 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46144 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46145 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46148 \begin_layout Standard
46151 Scroll below end of document
46153 is self-explanatory.
46156 \begin_layout Standard
46157 In \SpecialChar LyX
46158 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46165 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46167 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46168 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46171 \begin_layout Standard
46174 Sort environments alphabetically
46176 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46179 \begin_layout Standard
46182 Group environments by their category
46184 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46187 \begin_layout Standard
46192 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46207 \begin_layout Standard
46208 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46213 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46214 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46218 \begin_layout Subsection
46220 \begin_inset Index idx
46223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46230 \begin_inset Index idx
46233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46234 Settings ! Shortcuts
46242 \begin_layout Standard
46247 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46249 Several binding files are available, among them:
46252 \begin_layout Description
46253 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46256 \begin_layout Description
46257 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46269 \begin_layout Description
46270 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46281 \begin_layout Standard
46282 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46287 , and binding files for special languages.
46288 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46293 \begin_inset space \space{}
46297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46305 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46306 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46307 will try to use the appropriate binding
46311 \begin_layout Standard
46312 Some binding files, like
46316 , only have a limited scope.
46317 When looking at the end of the file
46321 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46324 \begin_layout Standard
46328 \begin_inset space ~
46332 \begin_inset space ~
46337 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46338 in the selected key binding file.
46341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46345 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46350 \begin_inset Index idx
46353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46354 Key Bindings ! Editing
46362 \begin_layout Standard
46363 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46364 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46365 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46366 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46369 Show key-bindings containing
46372 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46373 Insert there for example as keyword
46374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46381 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46382 functions that contain
46383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46391 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46392 All \SpecialChar LyX
46393 functions are also listed in the file
46398 that you will find in the
46405 \begin_layout Standard
46406 For example, to add the shortcut
46414 , select the function and press the
46419 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46420 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46423 \begin_layout Standard
46424 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46425 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46427 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46428 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46430 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46435 \begin_layout Standard
46436 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46439 \begin_layout Standard
46440 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46442 The syntax of the entries is:
46445 \begin_layout Standard
46451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46470 \begin_layout Standard
46471 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46472 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46500 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46501 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46502 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46503 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46505 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46509 , you needed to specify it as
46514 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46517 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46520 \begin_layout Subsection
46522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46524 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46529 \begin_inset Index idx
46532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46539 \begin_inset Index idx
46542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46543 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46551 \begin_layout Standard
46552 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46553 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46554 provides keyboard maps.
46555 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46556 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46559 \begin_inset space ~
46563 \begin_inset space ~
46568 and select the keyboard map file named
46575 \begin_layout Standard
46584 keyboard map and, if you use the
46588 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46591 arg "keymap-primary"
46597 arg "keymap-secondary"
46600 respectively or toggle between them with
46603 arg "keymap-toggle"
46609 \begin_layout Standard
46610 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46618 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46627 \begin_layout Standard
46628 You can also specify the mouse
46630 Wheel scrolling speed
46633 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46637 Middle mouse button pasting
46639 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46640 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46643 \begin_layout Standard
46651 \begin_inset space ~
46655 \begin_inset space ~
46660 you can select a key for zooming.
46661 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46664 \begin_layout Subsection
46668 \begin_layout Standard
46669 Input completion is described in section
46670 \begin_inset space ~
46674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46676 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46683 \begin_layout Section
46685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46692 \begin_inset Index idx
46695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46702 \begin_inset Index idx
46705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46714 \begin_layout Standard
46715 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46716 are normally determined during
46718 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46721 \begin_layout Description
46723 \begin_inset space ~
46726 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46727 's working directory.
46728 It is the default when you
46739 \begin_inset space ~
46747 \begin_layout Description
46749 \begin_inset space ~
46752 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46754 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46756 \begin_inset space ~
46760 \begin_inset space ~
46768 \begin_layout Description
46770 \begin_inset space ~
46773 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46779 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46783 \begin_inset Newline newline
46787 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46799 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46800 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46808 \begin_layout Description
46810 \begin_inset space ~
46814 \begin_inset Index idx
46817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46823 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46824 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46825 \begin_inset space ~
46829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46831 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46839 will be used to save the backups.
46840 \begin_inset Newline newline
46843 Backup files have the ending
46844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46854 \begin_layout Description
46856 \begin_inset space ~
46859 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46860 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46862 \begin_inset Newline newline
46869 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46875 You can edit this file with the program
46884 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46885 in its preferences under
46888 \begin_inset space ~
46894 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46899 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46901 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46902 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46908 and \SpecialChar LyX
46909 need to be running the same time.
46910 \begin_inset Newline newline
46913 The pipe is also used for the
46917 feature, see section
46918 \begin_inset space ~
46922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46924 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46929 \begin_inset Newline newline
46932 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46933 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46934 \begin_inset Newline newline
46950 \begin_layout Description
46952 \begin_inset space ~
46955 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46958 \begin_layout Description
46960 \begin_inset space ~
46963 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46964 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
46965 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
46968 \begin_layout Description
46970 \begin_inset space ~
46973 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
46979 You only need to specify it if you are using
46983 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
46985 For \SpecialChar LyX
46990 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
46994 \begin_layout Description
46996 \begin_inset space ~
46999 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47000 When \SpecialChar LyX
47001 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47002 to find it on the system.
47003 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47005 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47014 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47015 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47018 \begin_layout Description
47020 \begin_inset space ~
47023 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47024 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47025 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47026 code or in the document
47028 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47030 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47031 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47032 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47033 scanned for the input files.
47034 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47035 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47037 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47038 compilation may fail for some documents.
47041 \begin_layout Section
47045 \begin_layout Standard
47046 Here you can insert your
47055 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47057 \begin_inset space ~
47061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47063 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47067 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47070 \begin_layout Section
47072 \begin_inset Index idx
47075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47076 Language ! Settings
47082 \begin_inset Index idx
47085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47086 Settings ! Language
47094 \begin_layout Subsection
47096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47098 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47105 \begin_layout Description
47107 \begin_inset space ~
47111 \begin_inset space ~
47114 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47116 You can find its actual translation status here:
47117 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47119 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47127 \begin_layout Description
47129 \begin_inset space ~
47132 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47133 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47134 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47135 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47152 The most widespread language package is
47157 \begin_inset Index idx
47160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47167 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47169 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47170 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47171 come with the alternative
47177 \begin_inset Index idx
47180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47182 packages ! polyglossia
47187 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47188 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47194 The available selections are described in section
47195 \begin_inset space ~
47199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47201 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47208 \begin_layout Description
47210 \begin_inset space ~
47213 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47214 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47215 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47216 An example is the start command
47222 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47224 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47228 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47244 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47249 \begin_layout Description
47251 \begin_inset space ~
47259 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47260 command toggles the package on and off.
47263 \begin_layout Description
47265 \begin_inset space ~
47269 \begin_inset space ~
47272 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47276 \begin_layout Description
47278 \begin_inset space ~
47282 \begin_inset space ~
47285 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47289 \begin_layout Description
47291 \begin_inset space ~
47295 \begin_inset space ~
47298 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47299 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47300 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47302 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47309 \begin_layout Description
47311 \begin_inset space ~
47314 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47316 When this option is not set, the
47319 \begin_inset space ~
47324 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47326 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47329 \begin_inset space ~
47337 \begin_layout Description
47339 \begin_inset space ~
47345 \begin_inset space ~
47351 When it is not set, the
47354 \begin_inset space ~
47359 is set to the end of the document.
47362 \begin_layout Description
47364 \begin_inset space ~
47368 \begin_inset space ~
47371 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47372 language will be underlined in blue.
47375 \begin_layout Description
47377 \begin_inset space ~
47381 \begin_inset space ~
47384 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47385 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47388 \begin_layout Description
47390 \begin_inset space ~
47393 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47394 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47395 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47396 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47399 \begin_layout Subsection
47403 \begin_layout Standard
47404 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47405 \begin_inset space ~
47409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47411 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47418 \begin_layout Section
47422 \begin_layout Subsection
47424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47426 name "subsec:General-output"
47433 \begin_layout Description
47435 \begin_inset space ~
47438 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47440 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47442 \begin_inset space ~
47448 For a detailed description see section
47450 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47455 \begin_inset space ~
47463 \begin_layout Description
47465 \begin_inset space ~
47468 Options Options for the program
47472 that is used for the export format
47477 \begin_inset space ~
47481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47483 reference "subsec:Export"
47488 Possible options are listed in the
47493 \begin_inset Newline newline
47497 \begin_inset Flex URL
47500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47502 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47512 \begin_layout Description
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47518 \begin_inset space ~
47521 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47524 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47525 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47527 \begin_inset space ~
47533 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47536 \begin_layout Description
47538 \begin_inset space ~
47542 \begin_inset Index idx
47545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47552 \begin_inset Index idx
47555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47556 Settings ! Date format
47561 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47562 \begin_inset Newline newline
47566 \begin_inset Flex URL
47569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47571 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47577 \begin_inset Newline newline
47580 For example the format
47581 \begin_inset Newline newline
47585 \begin_inset Newline newline
47588 prints the date as day/month/year.
47591 \begin_layout Description
47593 \begin_inset space ~
47597 \begin_inset space ~
47600 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47601 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47604 \begin_layout Subsection
47610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47612 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47617 \begin_inset Index idx
47620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47621 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47630 \begin_layout Description
47632 \begin_inset space ~
47640 \begin_inset space ~
47644 \begin_inset space ~
47647 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47652 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47673 are used for Cyrillic.
47674 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47687 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47689 sets up in the background.
47690 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47693 \begin_layout Description
47695 \begin_inset space ~
47699 \begin_inset space ~
47703 \begin_inset space ~
47707 \begin_inset space ~
47710 options They only have an effect when the program
47714 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47717 \begin_layout Standard
47718 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47719 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47720 manuals of the applications.
47723 \begin_layout Description
47725 \begin_inset space ~
47728 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47729 \begin_inset space ~
47733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47735 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47742 \begin_layout Description
47744 \begin_inset space ~
47747 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47748 \begin_inset space ~
47752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47754 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47761 \begin_layout Description
47763 \begin_inset space ~
47766 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47767 \begin_inset space ~
47771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47773 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47780 \begin_layout Description
47786 \begin_inset space ~
47789 command Command for the program
47791 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47794 that is described in the section
47796 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47801 Additional Features
47806 \begin_layout Standard
47807 There are additionally the following options:
47810 \begin_layout Description
47812 \begin_inset space ~
47816 \begin_inset space ~
47820 \begin_inset space ~
47824 \begin_inset space ~
47829 \begin_inset space ~
47832 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47850 to separate folders.
47851 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47853 \begin_inset Index idx
47856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47863 \begin_inset Index idx
47866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47875 \begin_layout Description
47877 \begin_inset space ~
47881 \begin_inset space ~
47885 \begin_inset space ~
47889 \begin_inset space ~
47893 \begin_inset space ~
47897 \begin_inset space ~
47900 changes Removes all manually set
47906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47909 \begin_inset space ~
47914 dialog when changing the document class.
47917 \begin_layout Section
47919 \begin_inset space ~
47923 \begin_inset Index idx
47926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47935 \begin_layout Subsection
47937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47939 name "subsec:Converters"
47944 \begin_inset Index idx
47947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47956 \begin_layout Standard
47957 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47958 from one format to another.
47959 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47960 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
47967 \begin_inset space ~
47972 field and press the
47977 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
47981 \begin_inset space ~
47986 drop-down list, modify the
47990 field and press the
47997 \begin_layout Standard
48000 Converter File Cache
48006 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48008 Maximum Age (in days
48011 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48012 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48015 \begin_layout Standard
48016 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48017 definition, is described in the section
48028 \begin_layout Subsection
48030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48032 name "sec:File-Formats"
48037 \begin_inset Index idx
48040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48047 \begin_inset Index idx
48050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48059 \begin_layout Standard
48060 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48070 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48073 \begin_layout Standard
48074 You can also define the
48076 Default output format
48078 that is used when you use
48080 View, Update, View Master Document
48084 Update Master Document
48090 menu or the toolbar.
48093 \begin_layout Standard
48094 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48105 \begin_layout Standard
48106 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48108 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48109 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48110 This is done by specifying a
48115 More about this is described in the section
48126 \begin_layout Chapter
48127 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48129 \begin_inset Index idx
48132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48141 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48148 \begin_layout Standard
48150 \begin_inset space ~
48154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48156 reference "tab:Units"
48160 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48161 and used in this documentation.
48164 \begin_layout Standard
48165 \begin_inset Float table
48171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48172 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48190 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48198 \begin_inset Tabular
48199 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48200 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48409 scaled point (65536
48410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48488 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48561 % of original image width
48566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48877 \begin_layout Chapter
48879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48881 name "chap:Credits"
48888 \begin_layout Standard
48889 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48890 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48893 \begin_layout Itemize
48896 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48899 \begin_layout Itemize
48905 \begin_layout Itemize
48911 \begin_layout Itemize
48917 \begin_layout Itemize
48923 \begin_layout Itemize
48929 \begin_layout Itemize
48935 \begin_layout Itemize
48941 \begin_layout Itemize
48944 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48947 \begin_layout Itemize
48953 \begin_layout Itemize
48959 \begin_layout Itemize
48965 \begin_layout Itemize
48971 \begin_layout Itemize
48977 \begin_layout Itemize
48983 \begin_layout Itemize
48989 \begin_layout Itemize
48995 \begin_layout Itemize
48996 The \SpecialChar LyX
48998 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49008 \begin_layout Standard
49009 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49012 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49019 \begin_layout Bibliography
49020 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49021 LatexCommand bibitem
49028 The \SpecialChar LyX
49030 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49033 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49039 \begin_inset Newline newline
49043 \begin_inset Flex URL
49046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49048 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49056 \begin_layout Bibliography
49057 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49058 LatexCommand bibitem
49059 key "latexcompanion"
49064 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49066 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49067 Companion Second Edition.
49070 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49073 \begin_layout Bibliography
49074 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49075 LatexCommand bibitem
49081 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49084 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49088 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49091 \begin_layout Bibliography
49092 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49093 LatexCommand bibitem
49102 : A Document Preparation System.
49105 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49108 \begin_layout Bibliography
49109 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49110 LatexCommand bibitem
49120 The \SpecialChar TeX
49124 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49127 \begin_layout Bibliography
49128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49129 LatexCommand bibitem
49135 The \SpecialChar TeX
49137 \begin_inset Newline newline
49141 \begin_inset Flex URL
49144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49146 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49154 \begin_layout Bibliography
49155 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49156 LatexCommand bibitem
49162 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49164 \begin_inset Newline newline
49168 \begin_inset Flex URL
49171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49173 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49181 \begin_layout Bibliography
49182 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49183 LatexCommand bibitem
49190 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49192 name "Documentation"
49193 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49200 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49204 \begin_inset Newline newline
49208 \begin_inset Flex URL
49211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49213 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49221 \begin_layout Bibliography
49222 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49223 LatexCommand bibitem
49230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49232 name "Documentation"
49233 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49238 how to use the program
49240 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49244 \begin_inset Newline newline
49248 \begin_inset Flex URL
49251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49253 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49261 \begin_layout Bibliography
49262 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49263 LatexCommand bibitem
49270 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49272 name "Documentation"
49273 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49278 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49284 \begin_inset Index idx
49287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49289 packages ! biblatex
49295 \begin_inset Newline newline
49299 \begin_inset Flex URL
49302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49304 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49312 \begin_layout Bibliography
49313 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49314 LatexCommand bibitem
49321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49323 name "Documentation"
49324 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49329 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49335 \begin_inset Index idx
49338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49346 \begin_inset Newline newline
49350 \begin_inset Flex URL
49353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49355 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49363 \begin_layout Bibliography
49364 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49365 LatexCommand bibitem
49372 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49374 name "Documentation"
49375 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49385 \begin_inset Newline newline
49389 \begin_inset Flex URL
49392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49394 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49402 \begin_layout Bibliography
49403 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49404 LatexCommand bibitem
49405 key "makeindex-man"
49411 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49414 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49424 \begin_inset Newline newline
49428 \begin_inset Flex URL
49431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49433 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49441 \begin_layout Bibliography
49442 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49443 LatexCommand bibitem
49450 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49452 name "Documentation"
49453 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49463 \begin_inset Newline newline
49467 \begin_inset Flex URL
49470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49472 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49480 \begin_layout Bibliography
49481 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49482 LatexCommand bibitem
49489 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49491 name "Documentation"
49492 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49497 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49499 \begin_inset Newline newline
49503 \begin_inset Flex URL
49506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49508 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49516 \begin_layout Bibliography
49517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49518 LatexCommand bibitem
49525 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49527 name "Documentation"
49528 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49533 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49539 \begin_inset Index idx
49542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49550 \begin_inset Newline newline
49554 \begin_inset Flex URL
49557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49559 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49567 \begin_layout Bibliography
49568 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49569 LatexCommand bibitem
49576 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49578 name "Documentation"
49579 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49584 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49590 \begin_inset Index idx
49593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49595 packages ! enumitem
49601 \begin_inset Newline newline
49605 \begin_inset Flex URL
49608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49610 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49618 \begin_layout Bibliography
49619 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49620 LatexCommand bibitem
49627 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49629 name "Documentation"
49630 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49635 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49641 \begin_inset Index idx
49644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49646 packages ! fancyhdr
49652 \begin_inset Newline newline
49656 \begin_inset Flex URL
49659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49661 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49669 \begin_layout Bibliography
49670 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49671 LatexCommand bibitem
49678 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49680 name "Documentation"
49681 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49686 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49692 \begin_inset Index idx
49695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49697 packages ! hyperref
49703 \begin_inset Newline newline
49707 \begin_inset Flex URL
49710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49712 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49720 \begin_layout Bibliography
49721 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49722 LatexCommand bibitem
49729 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49731 name "Documentation"
49732 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49737 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49743 \begin_inset Index idx
49746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49754 \begin_inset Newline newline
49758 \begin_inset Flex URL
49761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49763 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49771 \begin_layout Bibliography
49772 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49773 LatexCommand bibitem
49780 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49782 name "Documentation"
49783 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49788 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49794 \begin_inset Index idx
49797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49799 packages ! prettyref
49805 \begin_inset Newline newline
49809 \begin_inset Flex URL
49812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49814 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49822 \begin_layout Bibliography
49823 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49824 LatexCommand bibitem
49831 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49833 name "Documentation"
49834 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49839 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49845 \begin_inset Index idx
49848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49850 packages ! refstyle
49856 \begin_inset Newline newline
49860 \begin_inset Flex URL
49863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49865 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49873 \begin_layout Bibliography
49874 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49875 LatexCommand bibitem
49882 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49885 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49890 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49892 \begin_inset Newline newline
49896 \begin_inset Flex URL
49899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49901 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49909 \begin_layout Bibliography
49910 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49911 LatexCommand bibitem
49918 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49921 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49926 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49928 \begin_inset Newline newline
49932 \begin_inset Flex URL
49935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49937 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49945 \begin_layout Bibliography
49946 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49947 LatexCommand bibitem
49954 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49957 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
49962 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49963 for Cyrillic languages:
49964 \begin_inset Newline newline
49968 \begin_inset Flex URL
49971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49973 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
49981 \begin_layout Bibliography
49982 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49983 LatexCommand bibitem
49990 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49993 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
49998 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50000 \begin_inset Newline newline
50004 \begin_inset Flex URL
50007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50009 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50017 \begin_layout Bibliography
50018 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50019 LatexCommand bibitem
50026 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50029 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50034 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50036 \begin_inset Newline newline
50040 \begin_inset Flex URL
50043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50045 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50053 \begin_layout Bibliography
50054 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50055 LatexCommand bibitem
50062 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50065 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50070 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50072 \begin_inset Newline newline
50076 \begin_inset Flex URL
50079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50081 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50089 \begin_layout Bibliography
50090 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50091 LatexCommand bibitem
50098 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50101 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50106 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50108 \begin_inset Newline newline
50112 \begin_inset Flex URL
50115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50117 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50125 \begin_layout Bibliography
50126 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50127 LatexCommand bibitem
50134 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50137 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50142 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50144 \begin_inset Newline newline
50148 \begin_inset Flex URL
50151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50153 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50161 \begin_layout Bibliography
50162 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50163 LatexCommand bibitem
50170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50173 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50178 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50180 \begin_inset Newline newline
50184 \begin_inset Flex URL
50187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50189 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50197 \begin_layout Bibliography
50198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50199 LatexCommand bibitem
50206 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50209 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50214 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50216 \begin_inset Newline newline
50220 \begin_inset Flex URL
50223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50225 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50233 \begin_layout Bibliography
50234 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50235 LatexCommand bibitem
50242 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50245 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50250 about new features in
50256 \begin_inset Newline newline
50260 \begin_inset Flex URL
50263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50265 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50273 \begin_layout Standard
50274 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50308 \begin_inset Note Note
50311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50318 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50319 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50320 bibliography is the second one:
50328 \begin_layout Standard
50329 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50330 LatexCommand bibtex
50331 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50332 options "biblio/alphadin"
50339 \begin_layout Standard
50340 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50344 \begin_layout Standard
50345 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50346 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50352 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50353 LatexCommand printindex